Fillable OWNER'S MANUAL

Fill Online, Printable, Fillable, Blank OWNER'S MANUAL Form

Use Fill to complete blank online OTHERS pdf forms for free. Once completed you can sign your fillable form or send for signing. All forms are printable and downloadable.

OWNER'S MANUAL

On average this form takes 123 minutes to complete

The OWNER'S MANUAL form is 596 pages long and contains:

  • 0 signatures
  • 0 check-boxes
  • 491 other fields

Country of origin: OTHERS
File type: PDF

BROWSE OTHERS FORMS

Related forms
Fill has a huge library of thousands of forms all set up to be filled in easily and signed.
Fill in your chosen form
Sign the form using our drawing tool
Send to someone else to fill in and sign.
find another form
 
OWNER'S MANUAL
MINI COUNTRYMAN
Contents
A - Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Cooper
Cooper S
Cooper S ALL4
Congratulations on your new MINI
This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of
this vehicle. It should stay with the vehicle when sold to provide
the next owner with important operating, safety and mainte-
nance information.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
© 2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/11, 11 03 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTENTS
The fastest way to find information on a particu-
lar topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 236.
Notes
4 General information
6 Reporting safety defects
AT A GLANCE
10 Cockpit
16 On-board computer
20 Letters and numbers
21 Voice activation system
CONTROLS
26 Opening and closing
37 Adjustments
43 Transporting children safely
46 Driving
55 Controls overview
66 Technology for driving comfort and safety
79 Lamps
83 Climate
88 Practical interior accessories
DRIVING TIPS
96 Things to remember when driving
NAVIGATION
108 Navigation system
109 Destination entry
118 Route guidance
126 What to do if…
ENTERTAINMENT
130 On/Off and tone
132 Radio
140 CD player
142 External devices
Communications
154 Hands-free device Bluetooth
163 Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
176 Office
183 MINI Connected
MOBILITY
188 Refueling
190 Wheels and tires
198 Under the hood
202 Maintenance
204 Care
208 Replacing components
218 Giving and receiving assistance
REFERENCE
224 Technical data
227 Short commands for the voice activation
system
236 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Notes General information
4
General information
Using this Owner's
Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you wish to sell your MINI at some time in
the future, remember to hand over this Owner's
Manual to the new owner; it is an important part
of the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your MINI
dealer will be glad to advise you at any time.
You can find more information about the MINI,
for example on its technology, on the Internet at
www.MINI.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you in
gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific
equipment and optional accessories, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele-
vant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
The individual vehicle
The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayerische
Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW AG.
When you ordered your MINI, you chose various
items of equipment. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment that the manufacturer of your MINI makes
available with a specific model range.
Bear in mind that the manual may contain infor-
mation on accessories and equipment that you
have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections
describing options and special equipment are
marked by asterisks
* to assist you in identifying
possible differences between the descriptions in
this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.
If your MINI features equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, observe the enclosed Sup-
plementary Owner's Manuals.
Status of this Owner's
Manual at time of
printing
The high level of safety and quality of MINI vehi-
cles is ensured by continuous development. For
this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
General information Notes
5
that features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance and
repair methods. Therefore, have the necessary
work on your MINI only carried out by a MINI
dealer or a workshop that has specially trained
personnel working in accordance with the spec-
ifications of the MINI manufacturer. If this work
is not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by the manu-
facturer of the MINI.
When you purchase accessories tested
and approved by the manufacturer of the MINI
and Original MINI Parts, you simultaneously
acquire the assurance that they have been thor-
oughly tested by the manufacturer of the MINI
to ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
The manufacturer of the MINI warrants these
parts to be free from defects in material and
workmanship.
The manufacturer of the MINI will not accept any
liability for damage resulting from installation of
parts and accessories not approved by the man-
ufacturer of the MINI.
The manufacturer of the MINI cannot test every
product made by other manufacturers to verify
if it can be used on a MINI safely and without risk
to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occu-
pants.
Original MINI Parts, MINI Accessories and other
products approved by the manufacturer of the
MINI, together with professional advice on using
these items, are available from all MINI dealers.
Installation and operation of accessories that
have not been approved by the manufacturer of
your MINI, such as alarms, radios, amplifiers,
radar detectors, wheels, suspension compo-
nents, brake dust shields, telephones, including
operation of any mobile phone from within the
vehicle without using an externally mounted
antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance,
CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar acces-
sories, may cause extensive damage to the vehi-
cle, compromise its safety, interfere with the
vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of
the MINI Limited Warranty. See your MINI dealer
for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems
may be performed by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using any certified
automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-
ductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Notes General information
6
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your MINI is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi-
tions and registration requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita-
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such a case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain road
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance mea-
sures:
> MINI Maintenance System
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
> Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or MINI of North
America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safer-
car.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You
can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele-
phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
General information Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Watch Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communications
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: Controls and displays
1 Adjusting the exterior mirrors, folding them
in and out
* 41
2
Parking lamps 79
Low beams 79
Automatic headlamp control
* 79
Adaptive Light Control
* 80
Turn signals 50
High beams 81
Headlamp flasher 50
Roadside parking lamps
* 81
Computer
* 56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
11
6 Ignition lock 46
7 Buttons
* on steering wheel
8 Horn: the entire surface
9 Adjusting the steering wheel 42
10 Releasing the hood 198
3 Tachometer 12
Instrument lighting 81
Resetting the trip odometer 55
4
Wiper system 51
5
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 46
Continuing cruise control
* 53
Right:
Storing speed and accelerating or
decelerating
Left:
Increase or reduce volume
Activating/deactivating cruise
control
* 53
Telephone
*:
Press: accepting and ending a call,
starting dialing
* of selected phone
number and redialing if no phone
number is selected
Activating/deactivating voice acti-
vation system
* 21
Changing the radio station
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
12
Displays
1 Tachometer 55
With indicator and warning lamps 13
2 Display for
> Current vehicle speed 55
> Indicator and warning lamps 13
3 Resetting the trip odometer 55
4 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission
* 48
> Computer
* 56
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 59
> Odometer and trip odometer 55
> Settings and information 57
> Personal Profile settings 26
5 Instrument lighting 81
6 Speedometer
With indicator and warning lamps 13
7 Control Display 17
8 Fuel gauge 55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
13
Indicator and warning
lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var-
ious combinations and colors in indicator area 1
or 2.
Some lamps are checked for proper functioning
and thus come on briefly when the engine is
started or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, page 62.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps in display area 1
indicate certain functions:
High beams/headlamp flasher 81
Fog lamps
* 81
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC
* regulates the drive forces
in order to maintain driving
stability 67
Parking brake applied 47
Engine malfunction with adverse effect
on exhaust emissions 203
Cruise control 53
Turn signals 50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
14
Around the center console
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
15
1 Microphone for voice activation system*
and for telephone in hands-free mode*
2 Indicator/warning lamp* for front passen-
ger airbags 77
4 Hazard warning flashers
5 Speedometer 12
6 Radio/CD 132
7 Air conditioner or automatic climate
control
* 83
8 Switches in the center console
9 Buttons in the center console
10 Changing to a different menu on the Control
Display 17
11 MINI joystick 16
Move in four directions, turn or press
12 USB audio interface
* 143
13 Accessing the main menu on the Control
Display 17
3
Reading lamps
* 82
Ambient lighting
* 82
Glass roof, electric
* 34
Interior lamps 82
Changing the radio station or track
Changing the audio source
Selecting waveband
Temperature
Recirculated-air mode
Air distribution for air conditioner
Air distribution to the windshield*
Air distribution to the upper body
area
*
Air distribution to the footwell*
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate
*
Maximum cooling*
Cooling function
Defrosting windows
*
Rear window defroster
Windshield heating
*
Air flow rate
Seat heating
* 40
Power windows, front 35
Power windows, rear 35
Central locking system, inside 30
Fog lamps
* 81
Safety switch for power windows in
rear passenger compartment 36
Sport button
* 69
Driving stability control systems
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 67
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC* 68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE On-board computer
16
On-board computer
The on-board computer integrates the functions
of a large number of switches. This allows these
functions to be operated from a single central
position. The following section provides an
introduction to basic menu navigation. The con-
trol of the individual functions is described in
connection with the relevant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 MINI joystick
The MINI joystick can be used to select menu
items and to adjust settings:
> Move in four directions, arrows 5
> Turn, arrow 6
> Push, arrow 7
3 Accessing the main menu 17
4 Changing to another menu 17
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions permit; otherwise, you may
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users by being distracted.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
On-board computer AT A GLANCE
17
Operating principle
As of radio readiness, the following message
appears on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the MINI joystick.
The main menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Open the main menu
Press the button.
All functions of the on-board computer can be
accessed via the main menu.
Selecting a menu item
Menu items displayed in white are available for
selection.
1. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired
menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
A new menu is displayed or the function is exe-
cuted.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that
should be selected are depicted in quotation
marks, e.g. "Settings".
Changing between panels
After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new
menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can
overlap.
Move the MINI joystick to the left or right to
switch between the panels.
Arrows pointing left or right indicate that addi-
tional panels can be accessed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE On-board computer
18
Open the Options menu
Move the MINI joystick to the right repeatedly
until the "Options" menu is displayed.
The following is displayed in the "Options"
menu:
> Screen settings.
> Control options for the selected menu.
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set-
ting is displayed.
3. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the set-
ting.
Activating/deactivating functions
Some menu items are preceded by a check box.
It indicates whether the function is activated or
deactivated.
Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates
the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
1. Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the MINI joystick until "Settings" is
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
3. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time/Date" is
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time:" is
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and
press the MINI joystick.
6. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and
press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
On-board computer AT A GLANCE
19
Status information
1 Time
2 Telephone status
> Incoming, outgoing or missed call
> Roaming
* active
> Text message
* received
3 Reception strength of the wireless net-
work, depends on the mobile phone
4 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD, external devices
> Telephone
*:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
5 Sound output is switched off or
display for traffic bulletins
*:
> "TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
> No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice activation system
*.
Switching Control
Display off/on
1. Move the MINI joystick to the right repeat-
edly until the "Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Switch off control display"
To switch on, press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Letters and numbers
20
Letters and numbers
Entering letters and
numbers
1. Turn the MINI joystick: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm entry.
Switching between letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Switching between uppercase and
lowercase letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering uppercase letters and lower-
case letters:
Wordmatch concept during navigation
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
Destination search: the entries are continuously
compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
> The only letters offered for entering
addresses are those for which data are avail-
able.
> Town/city names can be entered with the
spelling used in any of the languages avail-
able on the Control Display.
Symbol Function
Press the MINI joystick:
delete one letter or num-
ber
Press and hold the
MINI joystick: delete all let-
ters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
Symbol Function
Move the MINI joystick for-
ward: to switch from upper-
case letters to lowercase let-
ters
Move the MINI joystick for-
ward: to switch from lower-
case letters to uppercase let-
ters
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
21
Voice activation system
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems without
removing your hands from the steering wheel.
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands. It is not necessary to use
the MINI joystick.
The voice activation system transforms oral
commands into control signals for the selected
systems and provides support in the form of
instructions or questions.
Prerequisite
Via the on-board computer, select the language
in which the voice activation system is operat-
ing, so that the spoken commands can be iden-
tified. Setting the on-board computer language,
page 65.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
activation system is ready to receive spoken
commands.
2. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis-
play.
This symbol is displayed on the Control Dis-
play when you can enter additional commands.
If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via the on-
board computer.
Terminating or canceling voice
activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
The commands that are possible depend upon
which menu is currently shown on the Control
Display.
There are short commands for functions in the
main menu.
Some list items, for example telephone book
listings
*, can also be selected using the voice
activation system. Particularly say the list items
as they are displayed in the respective list.
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
vation system.
{Cancel}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
22
Having the possible commands read
aloud
Having the possible commands read aloud:
For example if you have selected "CD" the sys-
tem will read aloud the possible commands for
operating the CD player.
Help for the voice activation system
Calling up Help:
Additional commands
* for Help:
> {Help with examples}: information about
the current operating options and the most
important commands for them are
announced.
> {Help with voice activation}: information
regarding the principles behind the voice
activation system is announced.
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, page 227.
Open the main menu
Example: selecting the track of a CD
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the voice activation system
uses the standard dialog or the short version.
With the short version of the spoken dialog, the
requests and responses of the voice activation
system are shortened.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select a setting:
> "Default"
> "Short"
{Voice commands}
{Help}
{Radio} or {Radio on}
{Main menu}
3. Select the music track, e.g.:
{C D track …}
The system replies:
{{Track …}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
23
Notes
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Do not use the voice activation system to ini-
tiate an emergency call. In stressful situa-
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish-
ment of a telephone connection.
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. The same
applies to spelling when entering a destina-
tion for navigation.
> Always speak the commands in the lan-
guage of the voice activation system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the stan-
dard pronunciation of the station name.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
*
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Handle Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communications
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
26
Opening and closing
Keys/remote controls
Buttons for the remote control
1 Opening the liftgate
2 Unlocking
3 Locking
General information
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is recharged when it is in the igni-
tion lock while the car is being driven. You
should therefore use each remote control at
least twice a year to maintain the charge status.
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access
*, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
page 34.
If more than one remote control unit is used, the
settings called up and implemented depend on
which remote control is recognized when the
car is unlocked, refer to Personal Profile,
page 26.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 202.
New remote controls
Your MINI dealer can supply new remote con-
trols as additional units or as replacements in the
event of loss.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Driver's door, page 29.
Personal Profile
The concept
The functions of your MINI can be set individu-
ally. By means of Personal Profiles, most of these
settings are stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. When you unlock the car, the
remote control is recognized and the settings
stored for it are called up and implemented.
This means that your settings will be activated
for you, even if in the meantime your car was
used by someone else with another remote con-
trol and the corresponding settings.
At most three remote controls can be set for
three different people. A prerequisite is that
each person uses a separate remote control.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is being unlocked 27
> Automatic locking of the vehicle 30
> Triple turn signal activation 50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
27
> Settings for the displays on the on-board
computer, in the speedometer and in the
tachometer:
> 12 h/24 h mode of the clock 61
> Date format 62
> Brightness of the Control Display 65
> Language on the Control Display 65
> Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances
and temperature 58
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-
trol PDC
* 66
> Light settings:
> Pathway lighting 79
> Daytime running lights 80
> Automatic climate control
*: activating/
deactivating the AUTO program, setting the
temperature, air volume and air
distribution 85
> Entertainment:
> Tone control 131
> Adjusting volume levels 130
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for operation
whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Liftgate
> Fuel filler flap
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
*
> In cars with Comfort Access*, via the door
handles on the driver's and passenger's
sides
The remote control can also be used to switch
on/off the welcome lamps and interior lamps.
The alarm system
* is also activated or deacti-
vated, page 31.
Operating from inside
Button for central locking system, page 30.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
from outside
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. Take
the key with you when you leave the vehicle so
that the vehicle can be opened from the out-
side.<
Using the remote control
Unlocking
Press the button.
The welcome lamps and interior lamps come on.
Unlocking mode
You can also set which parts of the car are
unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote
control in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
28
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select a menu item:
> All doors
Press the button once to unlock
the entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock
only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap
*.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
Convenient opening
Hold the button down.
The power windows are opened and the glass
roof
* is tilted.
Convenient closing is not possible by
means of the remote control.<
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Setting confirmation signals
To have the vehicle confirm when it has been
locked or unlocked.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehicle
is switched on.
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages, etc.
Unlocking liftgate
Press the button for approx. 1 second
and then release it.
When it is opened, the liftgate swings out
and up toward the rear. Make sure that
adequate clearance is available before opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out, do
not place the key down in the cargo area. If the
liftgate was locked before opening, it will be
locked again after it is closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the liftgate
has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
page 26.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
29
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Using the door lock
You can set which parts of the car are unlocked,
page 27.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
When there is no alarm system
* or Com-
fort Access
*, only the driver's door is
locked with the door lock.<
To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the lift-
gate together:
> With the doors closed, press the interior cen-
tral locking button, page 30 to lock the vehi-
cle.
> Unlocking and opening the driver or passen-
ger door, page 30.
Locking the vehicle.
> Lock the driver's door with the integrated
key via the door lock, or
> press the safety lock button on the pas-
senger's door and close the door from
the outside.
Convenient operation
With an alarm system* or Comfort Access*, the
windows and glass roof
* can be operated via
the door lock.
Opening/closing
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Releasing the
key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, the
driver's door can be unlocked or locked by turn-
ing the integrated key in the door lock to the end
positions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
30
Opening and closing:
from inside
The switch locks or unlocks the doors and lift-
gate when the doors are closed, but the anti-
theft system is not activated. The fuel filler flap
remains unlocked
*.
Unlocking and opening
> Either unlock the doors together using the
switch for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of either door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Press the switch or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. Take
the key with you when you leave the vehicle so
that the vehicle can be opened from the out-
side.<
Automatic locking*
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks. The setting is stored for the remote con-
trol in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select a menu item:
> Lock if no door is opened
The central locking system automatically
locks the vehicle after a short time if no
door has been opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Liftgate
To avoid damage, make sure there is suf-
ficient clearance before opening the lift-
gate.<
Opening
In some market-specific versions, the lift-
gate cannot be unlocked using the remote
control unless the vehicle is unlocked first.
Only drive with the liftgate fully closed; other-
wise, the tail lamps will be obscured and driving
safety will be compromised.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
31
Press the top side of the MINI emblem, arrow, or
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and then release it. The lift-
gate is unlocked.
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the lift-
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may
occur.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim panel of
the liftgate make it easier to pull it down.
Alarm system*
The concept
The alarm system, when activated, reacts if:
> A door, the engine compartment lid or the
liftgate is opened
> There is movement inside the car
> The car's inclination changes, for instance if
an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the
wheels or to raise it prior to towing away
> There is an interruption in the power supply
from the battery
The alarm system briefly indicates unauthorized
entry or tampering by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
Arming and disarming
Whenever the car is locked or unlocked, the
alarm system is armed or disarmed.
Even when the alarm system is armed, you can
open the liftgate by means of the button
on the remote control.
When you subsequently close the liftgate it is
again locked and monitored.
In certain market-specific versions,
unlocking via the door lock triggers the
alarm.<
Panic mode*
You can activate the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button for at least two seconds.
Switching off the alarm:
Press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control.
> Insert the key fully into the ignition lock.
> In cars with Comfort Access
*, press the but-
ton on the door lock.
Display on the revolution counter
When the system is armed, all LEDs pulse. After
approx. 16 minutes one LED flashes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
32
> LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.
> One LED flashes at short intervals:
A door, the hood or the liftgate is not prop-
erly closed. Even if these are not closed fully,
the remaining items are deadlocked and the
LEDs pulse after approx. 10 seconds for
approx. 16 minutes. Afterwards, one LED
flashes.
The interior movement detector is not acti-
vated.
> LEDs go out after the vehicle is unlocked:
No attempt was made to tamper with the
car.
> LEDs flash after unlocking until the key is
inserted in the ignition, but for no longer
than approx. 5 minutes: an attempt was
made to tamper with the car.
Tilt alarm sensor
The vehicle's inclination is monitored. The alarm
is triggered, for instance, if an attempt is made
to steal the car's wheels or tow it away.
Interior movement detector
Before the interior movement detector can
operate correctly, the windows and glass roof
must be closed.
Avoiding false alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector can be switched off together.
This prevents false alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> When being transported on car-carrying
trains, ferries or trailers
> If pets are to remain inside the car
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior movement detector
> Press the button on the remote con-
trol twice in succession.
> Lock the vehicle twice with the integrated
key.
LEDs flash in short succession for approx.
2seconds.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector are switched off until the car is next
unlocked and locked.
Comfort Access*
Comfort Access enables you to enter your vehi-
cle without having to hold the remote control in
your hand. All you need to do is wear the remote
control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the
remote control within the immediate vicinity or
in the passenger compartment.
Functional requirements
> The vehicle or the liftgate can only be locked
when the vehicle detects that the remote
control currently in use is outside of the
vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started when the
vehicle detects that the remote control is
inside the vehicle.
> The doors and liftgate must be closed to be
able to operate the windows and glass sun-
roof
*.
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Convenient closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
33
> Unlocking the liftgate separately
> Starting the engine
Comparison to standard remote controls
Essentially, it makes no difference whether you
control the above-mentioned functions using
Comfort Access or by pressing the buttons on
the remote control for Comfort Access.
Instructions on opening and closing are found
starting on page 26.
Special features regarding the use of Comfort
Access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing the windows or glass roof, the sys-
tem is checking whether a remote control is
inside the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closing
procedure, if necessary.<
Unlocking
Press button 1.
Depending on the setting, refer to Unlocking
mode on page 27, only the driver's door or the
entire vehicle is unlocked.
Press the button again to lock the vehicle
again.<
Convenient opening with the remote control,
refer to page 28.
Locking
Press button 1.
For Convenient closing, press and hold button 1.
In addition, the windows and the glass sunroof
*
are closed.
Unlocking the liftgate separately
Press the top side of the MINI emblem.
If the vehicle detects that a remote control
has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo area after the liftgate is
closed, the liftgate will reopen slightly. The haz-
ard warning flashers flash and an acoustic sig-
nal
* sounds.<
Windows and glass roof, electric*
If the engine is switched off, you can still operate
the windows and glass sunroof so long as a door
or the liftgate has not been opened.
If the doors and liftgate are closed again and the
remote control is located inside the vehicle, the
windows and the glass sunroof can be operated
again.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock to
be able to operate the windows or glass sunroof
when the engine is switched off and the doors
are open.
Switching on radio readiness
Switch on radio readiness by briefly pressing the
Start/Stop button, page 46.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch;
otherwise, the engine will start.<
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can be
switched on when a remote control is inside the
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
control into the ignition lock, page 46.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, page 47.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
34
Before driving a vehicle with automatic
transmission into a car wash
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunction
Comfort Access may malfunction due to local
radio waves.
If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the
buttons on the remote control or using the inte-
grated key.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock
and start the engine.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp lights up when an
attempt is made to start the engine: the
engine cannot be started. The remote
control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunc-
tioning. Take the remote control with you inside
the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary,
insert another remote control into the ignition
lock.
The warning lamp lights up when the
engine is running: the remote control is
no longer inside the vehicle. After the
engine is switched off, the engine can only be
restarted within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp lights up and a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote con-
trol.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access contains
a battery that will need to be replaced from time
to time.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
3. Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a recycling center
or to your MINI dealer.<
Glass roof, electric*
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass roof and keep it in your
field of vision until it is shut.
Take the key with you when you leave the car;
otherwise, children could operate the roof and
possibly injure themselves.<
Tilting
> Press the switch backward to the resistance
point and hold it there.
Both glass roofs are tilted.
Releasing the switch stops the movement.
> With the ignition switched on, press the
switch backward beyond the resistance
point.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing CONTROLS
35
Both closed roofs are tilted fully.
Pressing again stops the movement.
Opening, closing
With the ignition switched on and the glass sun-
roof tilted, press the switch backward and hold it
there.
The front glass roof opens.
The rear glass roof is closed.
Releasing the switch stops the movement.
The glass sunroof can be closed in the same way
by pressing the switch forward.
The front glass roof remains in a tilted position.
The rear glass roof is tilted. Pressing on the
switch again closes both roofs completely.
Convenient operation via door lock or Comfort
Access, refer to page 28, 29, 33.
Roller sun blind
The roller sun blind can be opened and closed
independently of the glass roof.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be tilted. In this case,
have the system initialized. The manufacturer of
your MINI recommends that you have this work
done by your MINI dealer.
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
If, after a window is opened and closed
several times in close succession, the win-
dow can only be closed and not opened, the sys-
tem is overheated. Let the system cool for sev-
eral minutes with the ignition switched on or the
engine running.<
Opening, closing
Front window
> Press the switch downward.
The window opens until you release the
switch.
> Push the switch downward.
As of radio readiness, the windows will open
automatically. Push the switch again to stop
the opening movement.
The window can be closed in the same way by
pressing the switch up.
Rear window
> Press the switch downward.
The window opens until you release the
switch.
> Push the switch downward.
As of radio readiness, the windows will open
automatically. Push the switch again to stop
the opening movement.
The window can be closed in the same way by
pressing the switch up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Opening and closing
36
After switching off the ignition
When the ignition is switched off, the windows
can still be operated for approx. 1 minute as
long as no door is opened.
Take the key with you when you leave the
car; otherwise, children could operate the
electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
Pinch protection system
If the closing force rises beyond a predefined
threshold during closing, the system will stop
moving the window prior to lowering it again
slightly.
Even though there is the pinch protection
system, always ensure that the window's
travel path is clear; otherwise, the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions,
such as thin objects, and the window would con-
tinue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise, the
pinch protection system could be impaired.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win-
dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win-
dows normally, the window can be closed man-
ually.
1. Press the switch upward and hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Press the switch upward again within
approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The
window closes without pinch protection.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
windows from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, by children,
for example.
Press the button, arrow.
The LED lights up when this safety feature is acti-
vated.
Always press the safety switch when chil-
dren ride in the rear, otherwise uncon-
trolled closing of the windows could lead to inju-
ries.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Adjustments CONTROLS
37
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital contri-
bution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head restraints
and the airbags, the seated position has a major
influence on your safety in the event of an acci-
dent. To ensure that the safety systems operate
with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to
observe the instructions contained in the follow-
ing section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 43.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms
in the event of the airbag being triggered off.
No one and nothing should come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Ensure
that the front passenger is correctly seated, e.g.
that no feet or legs are propped against the
dashboard. Otherwise, leg injury could result if
the front airbag suddenly deployed.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not lean
against the cover of the head airbag, otherwise
injuries can occur when the airbags are trig-
gered.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circumstances.
The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a
mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individ-
uals. This effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 76.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 39.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Number of safety belts
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap.
Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low
across the hips and does not press against the
abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against
the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over
hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the
safety belt so that it is pulled taut across the lap
and shoulder, fitting the body snugly without
any twists. Otherwise, the belt could slide over
the hips in the event of a frontal collision and
injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing bulky cloth-
ing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body
area taut; otherwise, its restraining effect could
be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 40.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Adjustments
38
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a dan-
ger in the event of an accident of sliding under
the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor-
mally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 39 and on damaged safety belts
on page 41.
Seat adjustment, front
Observe the instructions on page 38 to
ensure the best possible personal protec-
tion.<
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever, arrow 1, and move the seat into the
desired position, arrows 2.
After releasing the lever, slightly move the seat
forwards or backwards so that it properly
engages.
Height
Pull up or push down the lever repeatedly,
arrows 1, until the desired height is reached.
Backrest
Pull lever, arrow 1, and apply weight to or
remove weight from the backrest as needed.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Adjustments CONTROLS
39
Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur-
vature.
Seat adjustment, rear
Do not adjust rear seats while the vehicle
is moving; otherwise, passengers could be
injured.
Make sure that the locking devices of the rear
seats engage properly. Otherwise the restrain-
ing effect of the safety belts during an accident
could be reduced.<
Longitudinal adjustment
1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the
desired position.
2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly
forward or back so that it engages properly.
Backrest
Adjusting backrest angle, refer to page 98.
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury in an accident.<
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Height adjustment
To raise: pull up.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove a head restraint if no one will be
sitting on the seat in question.
Reinstall the head restraint before trans-
porting passengers, as otherwise the head
restraint cannot provide its protective func-
tion.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Adjustments
40
Front
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Fold the backrest back slightly.
3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint
out as far as it will go.
4. Also press button 2 with a suitable tool and
completely remove the head restraint.
5. Fold back the backrest.
Rear
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.
3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint
out completely.
4. Also press button 2 with a suitable tool and
completely remove the head restraint.
5. Fold rear seat backrest back into position.
Seat heating*
Switching on
Press once for each temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
If you continue driving within the next
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the
battery.
The LEDs stay lit.
Switching off
Press button longer.
Safety belts
Observe the instructions on page 38 to
ensure the best possible personal protec-
tion.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Front and rear seats
Closing
Make sure you hear the lock engage in the belt
buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, page 38.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
Height adjustment for rear seat belt
tongues
When the outer rear seats are unoccupied, the
seat belt tongues can be slid back to the cargo
area trim panel with a clasp to prevent noise.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Adjustments CONTROLS
41
Safety belt reminder
Front seats
The indicator lamps come on and an
acoustic signal sounds.A message also
appears on the Control Display.Check
whether the safety belt has been fas-
tened correctly. The 'Fasten safety belts'
reminder is issued when the driver's safety belt
has not been fastened. The 'Fasten safety belts'
reminder is also activated at road speeds above
approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger's
safety belt has not been fastened, if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or
front passenger unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or stressed
in an accident: have the safety belt system
and its seat-belt tensioners replaced and the
belt anchors checked. Have this work carried out
only by a MINI dealer or by a workshop that has
specially trained personnel working in accor-
dance with the specifications of the MINI manu-
facturer; otherwise, correct operation of these
safety systems is not ensured.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is more
curved than the driver's mirror. The
objects seen in the mirror are closer than they
appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic
behind you on the basis of what you see in the
mirror; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an
accident.<
1 Adjusting the left or right exterior mirror
2 Folding mirrors in and out
*
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press
the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
Turn the knob beyond the pressure point in
direction 2. The mirrors can be folded in at road
speeds up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for
example, or for moving mirrors that were folded
in by hand back out into their correct positions.
Automatic heating*
At external temperatures below a certain limit,
both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
while the engine is running or the ignition
switched on.
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce glare from vehicles behind you when
you are driving at night:
Turn the knob.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Adjustments
42
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*
It is controlled by two photosensors:
> Inside the interior rearview mirror, arrow.
> On the back of the mirror.
For proper function:
> Keep the photosensors clean.
> Do not cover the area between the interior
rearview mirror and the windshield.
> Do not place stickers or decals on the wind-
shield in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion; otherwise, there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
distance and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise, the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
43
Transporting children safely
The right place for
children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening the
doors, for example.<
Children should always sit in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Only transport children under the age of
13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear
in a child restraint system suitable for their age,
weight and size. Otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child restraint system that is appro-
priate for their age, size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Front passenger airbags
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags must be deacti-
vated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of
injury to the child if the airbags deploy, even if
the child is seated in a child restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 76.
Child restraint systems,
installation
Before installing a child restraint system on the
rear seats, move the seat as far back as possible.
After the child restraint system has been
installed on the respective rear seat, move the
backrest forward so that the it rests lightly
against the child restraint system, refer to Rear
seat backrests on page 98.
Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child restraint systems. Oth-
erwise, the protective effect may be dimin-
ished.<
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front, side, and knee airbags for the front
passenger are deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up
* as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.
Child seat security
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be prevented from being
pulled out in order to secure child restraint sys-
tems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
44
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child restraint
fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.
To install and use the LATCH child restraint
system, follow the operating and safety
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
system; otherwise, the protective function of the
seat may be compromised.<
Anchor points for LATCH anchors
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located at the points indicated by the arrows.
Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors
are properly engaged and that the child
restraint system rests firmly against the seat
backrest; otherwise, the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
Child restraint system with tether strap
Use the tether strap anchors to secure
child restraint systems only; otherwise, the
anchors could be damaged.<
There are two additional anchors for child
restraint systems with tether straps, arrows.
Placement of the tether strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-
wise, the strap will not properly secure the child
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Rear cargo well
4 Tether strap hook
5 Anchor
6 Seat backrest
7 Tether strap of the child restraint system
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
45
Attaching upper retaining strap to the
attachment point
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint holders.
3. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using
the hook.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap tight.
Securing doors and
windows
Rear doors
Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for power windows
The rear power windows are blocked and can-
not be operated from the rear. Press safety
switch, refer to page 36.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
46
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting the key into the ignition lock
Insert the key all the way into the ignition lock.
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Removing the key from the ignition lock
Press in the key briefly. It is ejected slightly.
At the same time:
> The ignition is switched off if it was on
beforehand.
Automatic transmission
The key can only be removed if the selector lever
is in position P: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Press the Start/Stop button to switch radio readi-
ness or the ignition on and off. Do not depress
the brake or clutch while doing so.
If the Start/Stop button is pressed while
the clutch is depressed in the manual
transmission or the brake pedal is depressed in
the automatic transmission, the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate. The
time and external temperature are displayed in
the tachometer.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the key is removed from the ignition
lock
> When using Comfort Access
* by pushing the
button on the door handle or the
button on the remote control, refer to
Locking on page 33
> After a certain has elapsed
Ignition on
Most indicator and warning lamps in indicator
area 1, page 13, light up for varying lengths of
time.
When the engine is off, switch off the igni-
tion and any unnecessary electrical con-
sumers in order to preserve the battery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps in the displays
go out.
The ignition switches off automatically if the
driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/Stop
button again switches the ignition back on.
The ignition is not switched off in situations such
as the following:
> The clutch or brake is depressed
> The low beams are switched on
Starting the engine
Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, inhalation of the noxious
exhaust gases can lead to loss of consciousness
and death. Exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving CONTROLS
47
gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running; otherwise, such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car while the engine is run-
ning, place the transmission in neutral or move
the selector lever to position P and forcefully
apply the parking brake to prevent the car from
moving.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated start attempts in which
the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is
not burned or inadequately burned and there is
a danger of overheating and damaging the cat-
alytic converter.<
Do not let the engine warm up with the vehicle
at a standstill. Move off immediately at a moder-
ate engine speed.
When starting the engine, do not depress the
accelerator pedal.
Manual transmission
Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with Com-
fort Access, refer to page 32.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Automatic transmission*
Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with Com-
fort Access, refer to page 32.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Shift the selector lever into position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Switching off the engine
Always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
fully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Automatic transmission*
1. With the car at a stop, move the selector
lever to position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Before driving into a car wash
By following these steps, the vehicle is able to
roll:
1. Place the remote control, even with Comfort
Access, in the ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
48
Releasing
Pull upward slightly, press the button, arrow,
and guide the lever down.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force could lead to over-
braking and loss of traction, i.e. fishtailing, at the
rear axle.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission*
with Steptronic
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can
shift gears manually using Steptronic, page 49.
Parking the vehicle
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always
select position P and apply the parking
brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running.<
Removing the key
To remove the key from the ignition lock, first
move the selector lever into position P and then
switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the key
from the ignition lock, refer to page 46.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the tachometer
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is displayed, or the
current gear in the manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
> The selector lever can only be moved out of
position P when the ignition is switched on
or the engine is running.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving CONTROLS
49
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector
lever positions R and P.
Overriding the selector lever lock
Press the button on the front of the selector
lever, arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The transmission locks to prevent the drive
wheels from turning.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
Select this when you are in a car wash, for exam-
ple. The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, the fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in
position D.
Kickdown
Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Sports programming and manual mode
M/S
Move the selector lever from position D to the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis-
played. This position is recommended for a per-
formance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the Sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Shifting with the selector lever
Push the selector lever forward or pull it back to
activate manual operation. Steptronic shifts the
gear.
> Pull the selector lever in the + direction.
Transmission shifts up.
> Push the selector lever in the – direction.
Transmission shifts down.
The selected gear is displayed in the tachome-
ter, e.g. M1.
To use the automatic mode again, move the
selector lever to the right into position D.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when
they will result in a plausible combination of
engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a
downshift that would cause the engine to over-
rev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is displayed briefly, followed by
the current gear.
Shifting on the steering wheel*
With the selector lever in position D, automatic
drive, you can shift gears using the shift paddles
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
50
on the steering wheel. The transmission auto-
matically switches to manual mode.
If you do not shift gears with the shift paddles or
accelerate for a certain amount of time, the
transmission automatically returns to D, auto-
matic drive.
> Pull one of the shift paddles.
Transmission shifts up.
> Push one of the shift paddles.
Transmission shifts down.
M1 through M6 are displayed in the tachometer.
Manually releasing the selector lever
lock
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of
position P even though the ignition is switched
on, the brake is depressed and the button on the
selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock
can be overridden:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out. Disconnect the
cable connector if necessary.
3. Insert extractor hook 1 into the loop on the
passenger's side.
4. Pull the loop up.
5. Move the selector lever into the desired
position by pressing the button on the front
of the selector lever.
Before manually unlocking the selector
lever lock, firmly set the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away.<
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 Turn signal
2 Headlamp flasher
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the resis-
tance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that an indicator bulb has
failed.<
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
You can set whether the turn signal flashes once
or three times.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving CONTROLS
51
3. "Triple turn signal"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press button, arrow 3.
This symbol is displayed in the tachom-
eter.
Deactivate the rain sensor before entering
an automatic car wash. Failure to do so
could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain
sensor
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 46.
2. Press the button on the turn signal indicator
as often as necessary until "SET/INFO" is dis-
played.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
52
4. Press the button as often as necessary until
the symbol and "SET" are displayed.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button to select the desired sensi-
tivity.
7. Wait, or press and hold the button until the
display changes.
The settings are stored.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
Brief wipe
Press the lever downward once, arrow 2.
Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated briefly.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on,
the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
In cars equipped with an alarm system, the
headlamps cannot be cleaned when the hood is
open.
Do not use the washers when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will
damage the washer pump.
Only use the washers if the hood has been com-
pletely closed; otherwise, the headlamp washer
system
* may be damaged. Do not use the
washers if there is any danger that the fluid will
freeze on the windshield. If you do, your vision
could be obscured. For this reason, use anti-
freeze.<
Window washer nozzles
The window washer nozzles are heated auto-
matically
* while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
0 Rear wipers parked
1 To switch on intermittent wipe :
Turn the cap to level 1.
Operation is continuous in reverse gear.
The rear wiper does not move if the cap is in
interval stage 1 before the ignition is switched
on.
Cleaning the rear window
2 To clean the rear window during intermit-
tent wipe :
Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold it
there.
3 To clean the rear window when wipers are
parked :
Turn the cap to level 3 and hold it there.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving CONTROLS
53
Do not use the washers when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will
damage the washer pump.<
Washer fluid
Washer fluid is flammable. Keep it away
from ignition sources, only store it in the
closed, original container, and keep out of reach
of children; otherwise, there is a danger of
injury. Comply with the instructions on the con-
tainer.<
Washer fluid reservoir
Only refill washer fluid that contains anti-
freeze when the engine is cool, to avoid
contact with hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid
spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to per-
sonal safety.<
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 4.2 US quarts/4 liters.
Cruise control*
The concept
Cruise control is available at vehicle speeds of at
least approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then
stores and maintains the speed that you specify
using the button on the steering wheel.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose con-
trol of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
Activating
1 Resuming cruise control
2 Activating/deactivating cruise control
3 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed
4 Maintaining, storing and decreasing speed
Indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up. The
cruise control system is ready and can be acti-
vated.
Activating/deactivating cruise control
Press button 2.
The system is automatically deactivated if:
> braking takes place
> the clutch is engaged
> the transmission is set on N
> the stability control system is on
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Driving
54
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Maintaining current speed
Press button 3.
The system maintains and stores the current
vehicle speed.
If, on a downhill grade, the engine braking effect
is not sufficient, the controlled speed may be
exceeded. On uphill grades vehicle speed may
drop if the engine output is insufficient.
Increasing speed
Press button 3 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached. Every time you press the but-
ton, the speed increases by approx. 1 mph or
2km/h.
Accelerating using the button
Press and hold button 3.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the
accelerator pedal. After the button is released,
the driving speed is maintained and stored.
Decreasing speed
Press button 4 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached.
The functions here are the same as for increas-
ing the speed or accelerating, except that the
speed will be decreased.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press button 1.
The last speed stored is achieved again and
maintained.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Display in tachometer*
Selected speed is displayed briefly.
If --- mph or --- km/h is displayed briefly in
the tachometer, the conditions necessary
for operation may not be fulfilled.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp in the tachometer
lights up if the system fails. A message
appears on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
55
Controls overview
Tachometer
Never operate the engine with the needle in the
red overspeed zone of the gauge. In this range,
the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine.
Displays in tachometer
1 Current vehicle speed
2 Odometer, trip odometer, and external tem-
perature display
3 Resetting the trip odometer
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting the trip odometer
With the ignition switched on, press knob 3 in
the tachometer.
Units of measure
Select the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the
external temperature, page 58.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 12.4USgal/47liters.
You will find information on refueling on
page 188.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
The arrow next to the gas pump symbol of the
fuel gauge points toward the side of the vehicle
with the fuel filler flap.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone
of approx. 2.1 US gallons/8 liters the remaining
LEDs change from orange to red, arrow, and a
message is displayed briefly on the Control Dis-
play. The tachometer
displays the remaining
cruising range. When the range is less than
approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains
in the Control Display.
If the range displayed is less than
30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
56
wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and
damage could occur.<
Computer*
Displays in the tachometer
Press the button in the turn signal lever repeat-
edly to call up various items of information.
The following items of information are displayed
in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
> Average speed
> Outside temperature display
To set the corresponding units of measure, refer
to Units of measure on page 58.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
If the range displayed is less than
30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and
damage could occur.<
Average fuel consumption
Calculated for the time the engine has been run-
ning.
With the trip computer, page 57, you can have
the average fuel consumption for another trip
displayed.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn signal lever for approx.
2seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption to allow
you to see whether your current driving style is
conducive to fuel economy with minimum
exhaust emissions.
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
With the trip computer, page 57, you can have
the average speed for another trip displayed.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.
External temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/+36
ice can form. Therefore, drive carefully,
e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the
shade; otherwise, there is an increased accident
risk.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
57
Displays on the Control Display
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays in the "Onboard info":
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival if:
> A distance has been entered manually in
the computer, refer to information fur-
ther below
> A destination has been entered in the
navigation system, page 109
> Average fuel consumption
> Average speed
Displays in the "Trip computer":
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show:
> Average fuel consumption and
> Average speed.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
To reset the values for the average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu entry.
2. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the mes-
sage.
Resetting the trip computer
To reset all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Settings and information
Operating principle
Certain settings and information are only avail-
able when the ignition is switched on, the vehi-
cle is at a standstill and the doors are closed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
58
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
> Confirming selected display or set values
> Calling up computer information 56
Exiting displays
1. Briefly press the button in the turn signal
lever repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.
2. Press the button for a longer period.
Displays are also exited if no entries are made
for approx. 8 seconds.
Next setting or item of information
1. While in a setting or information item, briefly
press the button in the turn signal indicator
repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.
2. Press the button for a longer period.
The display changes directly to the next setting
or item of information.
Units of measure
To set the units of measure. The settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use,
refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.
Symbol Function
Adjusting rain
sensor
* 51
Calling up Check
Control 62
Displaying vehicle
check 63
Exiting the menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
59
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are briefly displayed
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can be
read out from the remote control by your
MINI dealer.<
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting information
Symbol Function
Engine oil*
Front brakes
Rear brakes
Roadworthiness test
Vehicle check
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
60
More information on the MINI Maintenance Sys-
tem can be found on page 202.
More information
Detailed information on service
requirements
You can have further information on the scope
of maintenance displayed on the Control Dis-
play, refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select an entry and press the MINI joystick.
To exit from the menu:
Move the MINI joystick toward the left. A list of
selected maintenance work and legally required
inspections, if necessary, is displayed.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, page 62; otherwise, the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is
not ensured.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Brake fluid
Exit display 58
Next setting or item of
information 58
Symbol Function
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
61
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the deadline entry menu.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjust-
ment.
10. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the MINI joystick to the left.
Clock
Setting the time zone*
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Turn MINI joystick until the desired time
zone is set and press the MINI joystick.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and
press the MINI joystick.
5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and
press the MINI joystick.
The system accepts the new time.
Setting the time format
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
62
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the MINI
joystick.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn MINI joystick until the desired day is
displayed and press the MINI joystick.
5. Create the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. Check Control messages
involve indicator and warning lamps in the dis-
play and, in some circumstances, an acoustic
signal as well as text messages at the bottom of
the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var-
ious combinations and colors in the indicator
areas 1 and 2.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Supplemental text messages
For most Check Control messages, you can view
more information later, e.g. regarding the cause
of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to
page 64.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
63
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.
Exit display:
"OK"
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn signal lever.
> Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified.
They cannot be hidden. If several malfunc-
tions occur at the same time, they are dis-
played in succession.
>They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
> Other Check Control messages are automat-
ically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but
remain stored.
>They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
The symbol indicates that Check Control mes-
sages have been stored. Check Control mes-
sages can be viewed whenever it is convenient.
Viewing stored Check Control messages
Stored Check Control messages can only be dis-
played if the driver's door is closed.
1. Press the button on the turn signal indicator
as often as necessary until "SET/INFO" is dis-
played.
2. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
3. Briefly press the button repeatedly until the
corresponding symbol and "CHECK INFO"
appear in the display.
4. Hold the button down.
If there are no Check Control messages, then
"CHECK OK" is displayed.
If a Check Control message has been stored,
the corresponding message is displayed. In
addition, the text message appears on the
Control Display.
5. Press the button to display any other mes-
sages.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Controls overview
64
The following are displayed on the on-
board monitor:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select a text message.
Speed limit
Enter a speed, and a Check Control message will
indicate when you reach this speed. This enables
you, for example, to receive warnings if you
exceed a speed limit in an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the limit.
5. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview CONTROLS
65
Altering settings
Language on the Control Display
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. Note, however,
that you can change the basic setting while the
low beams are switched on. The setting is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set-
ting is reached.
5. Press the MINI joystick.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly visible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
66
Technology for driving comfort and
safety
Park Distance Control
PDC*
The concept
PDC assists you with parking in reverse. Acoustic
signals and a visual indicator
warn you of the
presence of an object behind the vehicle. The
measurement is carried out by four ultrasonic
sensors in the rear bumper.
These sensors have a range of approx.
6.5ft/2m. However, an acoustic warning
does not sound until an object is approx. 24 in/
60 cm from the rear corner sensors or approx.
5 ft/1.50 m from the rear center sensors. PDC is
a parking aid that can display objects, which are
slowly being approached, which is the usual
case when parking a vehicle. Avoid approaching
an object at high speed; otherwise, physical cir-
cumstances may lead to the system warning
being issued too late.<
Automatic mode
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated automatically after
approx. 1 second when you engage reverse
gear or move the automatic transmission selec-
tor lever to position R. Wait this short period
before driving.
Acoustic signals
As the distance between vehicle and object
decreases, the intervals between the tones
become shorter. If the distance to the nearest
object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a
continuous tone sounds.
If the distance remains constant, e.g. when driv-
ing parallel to a wall, the acoustic signal stops
after approx. 3 seconds.
Malfunction
Indicator lamp lights up. PDC has failed.
A message appears on the Control Dis-
play.Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not direct the
jet toward the sensors for lengthy periods and
only spray from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning
To have the system show distances to objects on
the Control Display. The contours of distant
objects are shown on the Control Display even
before the acoustic signal sounds. The display
appears on the Control Display as soon as the
transmission is shifted into reverse or the selec-
tor lever is moved into the R position.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for esti-
mating the distance between the vehicle
and any obstructions always remains with the
driver. Sensors, too, have blind spots in which
objects cannot be detected. Moreover, ultra-
sonic detection can reach its physical limits with
objects such as trailer tow bars and couplings,
thin and wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low
objects already indicated, such as curbs, may
enter the sensors' blind spots before or after a
continuous audible signal is given. Higher, pro-
truding objects, such as wall ledges, may not be
detectable. Therefore, always drive cautiously;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage. Loud sound sources outside
or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
67
Driving stability control
systems
Your MINI has a number of systems that help to
maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse
driving conditions.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with driving stability control systems.
An appropriate driving style always remains the
responsibility of the driver. Therefore do not
reduce the additional safety margin by engaging
in hazardous driving thereby running the risk of
an accident.<
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak-
ing. Safe steering response is maintained even
during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
Braking safely, refer to page 97.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine.
Cornering Brake Control CBC
Driving stability and steering characteristics are
further enhanced while braking in turns or dur-
ing a lane change.
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake Assist
Rapidly depressing the brake causes this system
to automatically develop maximum braking
force. Thus, the system helps keep braking dis-
tance to a minimum. At the same time, all the
benefits provided by ABS are exploited.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
The concept
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or accel-
erate.
DSC also detects unstable driving conditions
such as when the vehicle's rear end fishtails or
the vehicle is sliding on its front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions at the indi-
vidual wheels.
Every time that the engine is started, the DSC is
ready to operate.
Deactivating DSC
Press the button until the DSC OFF indicator light
on the speedometer is on and DSC OFF is dis-
played on the tachometer. DSC is deactivated.
Stabilizing and propulsion promoting actions are
no longer executed.
When driving with snow chains or to 'rock free'
in snow, it can be helpful to switch off DSC for a
brief period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again: the DSC indicator lamps
in the display elements go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
68
For better control
The indicator light on the tachometer is
flashing:
The DSC controls the driving and brak-
ing forces.
The indicator light DSC OFF on the
speedometer is on and DSC OFF is dis-
played on the tachometer:
DSC is deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC*
The concept
DTC is a type of DSC that is propulsion optimized
for special road conditions such as uncleared
snowy roads. The system ensures maximum
propulsion though with restricted driving stabil-
ity. You therefore need to drive with suitable
caution.
In the following exceptional situations, it can be
useful to briefly activate DTC:
> when driving on snow-covered inclines, in
slush, or on uncleared snowy roads
> when rocking the vehicle free, driving out of
deep snow or on loose surfaces
> when driving with snow chains
Activating the DTC*
Press the button; the indicator light DSC OFF on
the speedometer comes on and TRACTION is
displayed on the tachometer.
The Dynamic Stability Control DSC is deacti-
vated; the Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
vated.
For better control
The indicator light on the tachometer is
flashing:
DTC controls the driving and braking
forces.
The indicator light on the speedometer
is on and TRACTION is displayed on the
tachometer:
DTC is activated.
Deactivating the DTC*
Press button again, the indicator light DSC OFF
on the speedometer and TRACTION on the
tachometer go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
69
Deactivating the DTC* and DSC together
Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indi-
cator light DSC OFF on the speedometer comes
on and DSC OFF is displayed on the tachometer.
The Dynamic Traction Control DTC and Dynamic
Stability Control DSC are both deactivated. There
will be no more stabilizing interventions.
Interventions (differential lock
*) in braking
occur to improve propulsion when drive wheels
are rotating unevenly, even when the DSC is
deactivated.
Activating DSC
Press the button again: the indicator lamps go
out.
Hill Assist
Hill Assist aids you in comfortably driving off on
inclines. It is not necessary to use the parking
brake for this.
1. Hold the MINI with the brake.
2. Release the brake and immediately drive
off.
Hill Assist holds the car in place for approx.
2 seconds after the brake is released.
Depending on the load and gradient, the
vehicle can roll backward slightly during
this period. After you release the brake, immedi-
ately start driving since the Hill Assist only holds
the vehicle for about 2 seconds, and it will start
to roll backward.<
ALL4 all-wheel drive system*
ALL4 is the all-wheel drive system of your MINI.
The combined effects of ALL4 and DSC further
optimize the traction and dynamic driving char-
acteristics. The ALL4 all-wheel drive system vari-
ably distributes the drive force to the front and
rear axle depending on the driving situation and
prevailing road conditions.
Sport button*
Pressing the button causes your MINI to respond
even more sportily.
> Engine responds more spontaneously to
movements of the accelerator.
> Steering response is more direct.
> Cooper S: the engine sounds more sporty in
coasting mode.
With automatic transmission:
> More rapid gear shifting in Sport program.
Activating the system
Press the SPORT button.
The LED lights up.
SPORT is briefly displayed in the tachometer.
Deactivating the system
> Press the SPORT button again.
> Switch off the engine.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla-
tion pressure in the tires.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
70
The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by
comparing the rotational speeds of the individ-
ual wheels while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre-
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
The system must have been initialized while the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Initialize the system after every correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can-
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla-
tion pressure regularly.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in
the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be
displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or
not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initializing the system
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
tire pressures as reference values for the detec-
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con-
firming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
5. Select "Reset" to start the initialization.
6. Start to drive.
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
71
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. An acoustic signal also
sounds.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
pressure.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
normal tires or with run-flat tires
*.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 196, are identi-
fied by a circular symbol containing the let-
ters RSC on the tire sidewall.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stability
Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires*
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do so, check the inflation pressure in all
four tires.
The inflation pressure display of the Mobility
System, page 212, can be used for this pur-
pose.
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor-
rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
been initialized. The system must then be
initialized.
If it is not possible to identify the damaged
tire, contact your MINI dealer
2. Use the Mobility System to remedy the flat
tire on the damaged wheel, refer to
page 212.
Run-flat tires*
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph or 80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/
h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
sure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor-
rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
been initialized. The system must then be
initialized.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive depends on
the load and the stress on the vehicle while driv-
ing.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turn-
ing abruptly and driving over obstacles such as
curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to a
considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, exter-
nal temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g.
reduced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop-
erties.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce
your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; oth-
erwise, pieces of tire may come off, which could
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
72
result in an accident. Do not continue driving
and contact your MINI dealer.<
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM*
The concept
Measuring the inflation pressure in the four
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is
a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
The system must have been reset while the
inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reli-
able signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Reset the system again after each correction of
the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limitations
Sudden, serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
The system does not operate correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated despite correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
> If a wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted
> Interference with TPM by other systems or
devices with the same transmission fre-
quency.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
can be displayed by the on-board computer,
e.g. whether or not the TPM is activated.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status indicator on the on-board
computer
The tire and system condition is indicated by the
color of the tires.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only required when this is indi-
cated by the TPM.
Green wheels
The inflation pressure corresponds to the
desired state.
"TPM active" is displayed on the on-board com-
puter.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in the indicated tire.
All wheels yellow
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in several tires.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Gray wheels
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Reasons for this may be:
> TPM is being reset.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
73
> Interference from systems or devices with
the same transmission frequency.
> Malfunction.
Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correction of
the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Select "Reset" to start the initialization.
6. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The resetting process is
completed automatically as you drive. The tires
are depicted in green on the Control Display and
"Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When
driving resumes, resetting is continued auto-
matically.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting, all tires on the Control Display
are displayed in yellow. The message "Low tire!"
is displayed.<
Message with low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the on-
board computer. An acoustic signal also
sounds. The position of the faulty tire is
displayed.
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in the indicated wheel.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
normal tires or with run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 196, are identi-
fied by a circular symbol containing the let-
ters RSC on the tire sidewall.
When a low inflation pressure is reported, the
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do so, check the inflation pressure in all
four tires. The inflation pressure display of
the Mobility System, page 212, can be used
for this purpose.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four
tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. The system must then be
reset.
If it is not possible to identify the damaged
tire, contact your MINI dealer.
2. Use the Mobility System to remedy the flat
tire on the damaged wheel, refer to
page 212.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
74
The use of tire sealant, e.g. Mobility System,
can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked and
replaced if necessary at your earliest oppor-
tunity.
Run-flat tires*
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
Continued driving with a flat tire
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80
km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
sure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four
tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. The system must then be
reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive depends on
the load and the stress on the vehicle while driv-
ing.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turn-
ing abruptly and driving over obstacles such as
curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to a
considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, exter-
nal temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g.
reduced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop-
erties.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate complete failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop; otherwise, pieces of tire may come off,
which could result in an accident. Do not con-
tinue driving and contact your MINI dealer.<
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in yel-
low and then lights up continuously; the
larger warning lamp lights up in yellow.
On the on-board computer, the tires are
shown in gray and a message appears.
No flat tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
> Wheel without TPM electronics is mounted:
If need be, have it checked by your MINI
dealer.
> Malfunction:
Have the system checked
> TPM was unable to complete the resetting
procedure; reset the system again.
The small warning lamp flashes in yel-
low and then lights up continuously; the
larger warning lamp lights up in yellow.
On the on-board computer, the tires are
shown in gray and a message appears.
No flat tire can be detected.
Display in the following situation:
> Interference due to systems or devices that
use the same radio frequency:
The system automatically reactivates once it
is outside of the field of interference.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
75
Message for unsuccessful system reset
Yellow warning light comes on. A mes-
sage appears on the on-board com-
puter.
The system has detected a wheel change, but
has not yet been reset. It is not possible to pro-
vide a reliable warning about the current infla-
tion pressure.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, page 73.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehi-
cle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pres-
sure for those tires. As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres-
sure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not reached
the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure tell-
tale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
76
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Knee airbag
3 Side airbags in backrests
4 Head airbags at the front and rear
Protective action
Observe the instructions on page 37 to
ensure the best possible personal protec-
tion.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head
and side airbags help provide protection in the
event of side impact. The relevant side airbag
supports the side upper body area. The head air
bag supports the head.
The airbags are designed to not be triggered in
every type of collision, e.g. not in minor acci-
dents, certain rollover situations or rear impacts.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and window on the passen-
ger side free from obstruction, i.e. do not cover it
with adhesive film or coverings, and do not affix
any holders such as for a navigation device or a
mobile phone.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes the
upholstery in the center of the steering wheel,
on the instrument cluster, the doors, and the
roof pillars as well as the sides of the headliner.
Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the
steering wheel.<
Do not touch the individual components
immediately after the system has been
triggered, because there is a danger of burns.
Have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal
of airbag generators executed only by your MINI
dealer or a workshop that has the required
explosives licenses.
Otherwise, unprofessional attempts to service
the system could lead to failure in an emergency
or undesired airbag activation, either of which
could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air-
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The presence of a passenger in the front passen-
ger seat is detected by measuring the resistance
of the human body. The system correspondingly
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS
77
activates or deactivates the front, side, and knee
airbags for the front passenger.
Make sure that the front passenger's feet
remain in the footwell; otherwise, it is not
possible to guarantee the function of the front
passenger airbags.<
The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
mirror shows the current status of the front pas-
senger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to
Status of front passenger airbags below.
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety informa-
tion and follow the instructions under Transport-
ing children safely, page 43.<
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation
When teenagers and adults assume certain sit-
ting positions, this can cause the front, side, and
knee airbags to deactivate. The indicator lamp
for the front passenger airbags lights up when
this occurs. In such cases, the passenger should
change his or her sitting position so that the
front passenger airbags are activated and the
indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag
status cannot be achieved by changing the sit-
ting position, transport the relevant passenger
on a rear seat.
> Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically recommended
by the manufacturer of your MINI.
> Do not place items on the front passenger
seat.
> Do not place items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below.
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger's front, side, and knee airbags in
accordance with whether and how the front
passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp
shows whether the front passenger airbags are
activated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child restraint system
is properly detected on the seat or the seat is
unoccupied.
The front, side, and knee airbags for the
front passenger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system. This particularly applies to
child seats that were required by NHTSA at
the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After
installing a child seat, check that the indica-
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags
lights up. It indicates that the child seat has
been detected and that the front passenger
airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on as long
as a person of sufficient size and in a correct
sitting position is detected on the seat.
The front, side, and knee airbags for the
front passenger are activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety
78
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, page 46, the warning
lamp lights up briefly to indicate that the entire
airbag system and the belt tensioners are oper-
ational.
Airbag system malfunction
> The warning lamp does not come on when
radio readiness is switched on.
> The warning lamp stays lit continuously.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a severe accident occurs.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Lamps CONTROLS
79
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off and daytime running lights
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control
*, daytime run-
ning lights, welcome lamps, and Adaptive
Light Control
*
When you open the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch
position 1.
Parking lamps
Turn the light switch to position 1.
The front, rear and side vehicle lighting is
switched on.
Activation of lights on one side of the vehicle for
parking, page 81.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Low beams
Turn the light switch to position 2.
The low beams come on when the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. Adaptive
Light Control
* is active.
The headlamps may also come on when the sun
is sitting low on a blue sky.
When driving into tunnels with bright overhead
lights, there may be a delay before the head-
lamps come on.
The low beams remain switched on indepen-
dent of the ambient lighting conditions when
you switch on the fog lamps
*.
If the daytime running lights are activated,
page 80, the low beams are always switched on
with the light switch in position 3 and the igni-
tion on. The exterior lamps are automatically
switched off after the vehicle is parked.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should respond to these kinds
of low-visibility situations by switching the head-
lamps on manually.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in the low beam or
automatic headlamp control position when you
switch off the ignition, the parking lamps and
interior lamps come on for a certain time as soon
as the vehicle is unlocked.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after
switching off the ignition with the lamps
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Lamps
80
The setting is stored for the remote control in
use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Setting the duration or deactivating the
function
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.:"
4. Set a time of duration or deactivate the func-
tion.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lights*
The light switch can remain in the lamps off,
parking lamps or automatic headlamp control
*
position.
In the lamps off position, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off after the vehicle is
parked. In the parking lamps position, the park-
ing lamps will stay on after the ignition is
switched off.
Switch on the parking lamps separately if
needed.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lights
The setting is stored for the remote control in
use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Adaptive Light Control*
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 79.
Standstill function
*: to avoid blinding oncoming
traffic, the Adaptive Light Control directs light
toward the front passenger side when the vehi-
cle is at a standstill.
In reverse, the Adaptive Light Control is not acti-
vated.
Malfunction
A message is displayed.
The Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos-
sible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Lamps CONTROLS
81
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
1 Turn signals/roadside parking lamps*
2 Switching on high beams
3 Switching off high beams/headlamp flasher
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side for
parking. Comply with local regulations when
doing so.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press and hold the
lever up or down, arrow 1.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever up or down to the pressure point.
Fog lamps*
Press the button to switch the lamps on and off.
Fog lamps*
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The
green indicator lamp lights up when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fog
lamps are switched off when you activate the
headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are on.
Increasing brightness
Press and hold the button until the desired
brightness is reached.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Lamps
82
Reducing brightness
Press the button briefly.
The brightness decreases every time the button
is pressed.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, the footwell lamps*, the
entry lamps
*, and the cargo area lamp are con-
trolled automatically.
To reduce the drain on the battery, a short
while after the ignition is switched off,
refer to Start/Stop button on page 46, all lights in
the vehicle's passenger compartment are
switched off.<
Switching interior lamps on/off manually
To switch the interior lamps on/off.
Press the switch.
To switch off the interior lamps permanently,
press the switch for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps*
Reading lamps are provided in the front and
rear* adjacent to the interior lamps.
To switch the reading lamps on and off.
In the front: press the switch.
In the rear: press the button.
Ambient lighting*
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting
can be changed.
> Press the switch forward.
The color changes in stages.
> Press the switch toward the rear.
The brightness changes in stages.
Intermediate settings and colors are possible.
For a continuous color change in the
ambient lighting, press and hold the
switch toward the front for longer than
10 seconds.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Climate CONTROLS
83
Climate
Equipment versions
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, your
MINI contains an air conditioner
or an automatic
climate control
*.
1 Air conditioner 84
2 Automatic climate control
* 85
Air vents
3 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
4 Air to the upper body area, draft-free venti-
lation
5 Air to the footwell
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Climate
84
Air conditioner
1 Air flow rate
2 Cooling function
3 Recirculated-air mode
4 Temperature
5 Rear window defroster
6 Air distribution
7 Windshield heating
*
Air flow rate
Adjust the air flow rate. The higher the
rate, the more effective the heating or
cooling will be.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery.
Switching the system on/off
Turn the air flow rate rotary switch to 0. Blower
and air conditioner are completely switched off
and the air supply is cut off.
Set any desired air flow rate to switch on the air
conditioner.
Cooling function
When the cooling function is on,
the air is cooled, dried, then
reheated according to the temper-
ature setting. This function is only available
while the engine is running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
To cool the air more quickly and intensely
when the external temperature is high,
you can switch on the recirculated-air mode.<
Recirculated-air mode
If the air outside the car has an
unpleasant odor or contains pollut-
ants, shut off the supply to the inte-
rior of the car temporarily. The system then
recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.
If the windows fog in recirculated-air
mode, switch off the recirculated-air
mode and increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over an extended period of time; otherwise, the
air quality in the passenger compartment will
deteriorate continuously.<
Temperature
Turn upward, red, to increase the temper-
ature.
Turn downward, blue, to decrease the
temperature.
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
The rear window heating is lowered
or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on
the battery.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Climate CONTROLS
85
Air distribution
Direct the flow of air to the
windows , to the upper body
area or to the footwell .
Intermediate settings are possible.
Windshield heating*
The windshield heating is switched
off automatically after a short time.
The front window heating is low-
ered or switched off entirely to reduce the drain
on the battery.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
1. Set air flow rate to the maximum level.
2. Set air distribution to position .
Condensation is removed from the windows
more quickly when the cooling function
* is
also activated.
3. Set to the highest temperature, red.
4. Deactivate recirculated-air mode.
5. Turn on windshield heating if necessary.
6. Turn on rear window defroster if necessary.
Microfilter
The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The
microfilter is changed by your MINI dealer dur-
ing routine maintenance work.
Automatic climate control*
1 Air flow rate, manual
2 AUTO program
3 Recirculated-air mode
4 Maximum cooling
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Temperature
7 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
sation
8 Cooling function
9 Rear window defroster
10 Windshield heating
*
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 2 offers the ideal air distribution
and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer
to AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfort-
able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail about
how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile set-
tings on page 26.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Climate
86
Air flow rate, manual
Press the – button to reduce air flow. Press
the + button to increase it.
You can reactivate the automatic mode
for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The
display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
Reduce the air flow by pressing the – button
repeatedly until the system is switched off. All
displays go out.
Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic
climate control back on.
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, toward the upper body area and
into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and
your temperature specifications will be adapted
to outside influences in accordance with sea-
sonal changes, e.g. sunlight.
The cooling function is automatically switched
on along with the AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode
Recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air is permanently shut
off. The system then recirculates
the air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces, press the AUTO
button or switch off the recirculated-air mode
and, if necessary, increase the air flow rate.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over an extended period of time; otherwise, the
air quality in the passenger compartment will
deteriorate continuously.<
Maximum cooling
At external temperatures above
327/06 and when the engine is
running, you obtain a maximum
cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic climate control goes into recircu-
lated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air
flows at maximum rate from the vents for the
upper body area. You should therefore open
them for maximum cooling.
Air distribution, manual
The flow of air is directed to the
windows, to the upper body area or
to the footwell as selected.
You can switch the automatic air
distribution back on by pressing the AUTO but-
ton.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature individually.
The automatic climate control achieves
this temperature as quickly as possible
regardless of the season, using maximum
cooling or heating power if necessary, and then
maintains it.
If you switch between different tempera-
ture settings in quick succession, the auto-
matic climate control does not have enough
time to achieve the set temperature.<
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's equip-
ment, the upper wires serve as an
antenna and are not part of the rear window
defroster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Climate CONTROLS
87
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly removes ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the
cooling function.
The windshield heating
* is switched on auto-
matically.
Windshield heating*
The windshield heating is switched
off automatically after a certain
time.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be cooled
while the engine is running.
When the cooling function is on,
the air is cooled, dried, then
reheated according to the temper-
ature setting.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started. The
recirculated-air mode may be switched on auto-
matically.
When the AUTO button is pressed, the cooling
function switches on automatically.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The
activated-charcoal filter provides additional pro-
tection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the
outside air. Your MINI dealer replaces this com-
bined filter as a standard part of your scheduled
maintenance.
You can call up further information in the service
requirements display, page 59.
Ventilation
1 Knob for continuous opening and closing
2 Jet for direction of air flow
Opening/closing
Turn the knob.
Direction of air flow
Swivel the entire jet.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Practical interior accessories
88
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal
remote control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmitters
for various remote-controlled devices, such as
garage and gate openers and lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control regis-
ters and stores signals from the original hand-
held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. The system in question can then
be operated by means of the programmed
memory button 1. The LED 2 flashes to confirm
transmission of the signal.
If you decide to sell your vehicle one day, in the
interest of your own security, remember to clear
the stored programs before the vehicle leaves
your possession, page 89.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no
people, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Comply also with the safety
instructions supplied with the original hand-held
transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device is
compatible with the integrated universal remote
control.
For additional information, please contact your
MINI dealer or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet
at:
www.homelink.com
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, page 46.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
press both outer memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. All stored programs are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 1in/2.5cm to 3in/8cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories CONTROLS
89
60 seconds, alter the distance and repeat
this step.
Canada: if the LED is not flashing rapidly
after 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step or, if the programming was
interrupted by the hand-held transmitter,
press and hold the memory button and
press the button on the hand-held transmit-
ter for 2 seconds and release several times.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the system with the engine
running or with the ignition switched on.
If the system fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote con-
trol. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly and then remains
lit for about two seconds, then the original
hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code
system. If it uses an alternating-code system,
program the memory buttons 1 as described
under Alternating-code hand-held transmit-
ters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be set. You will find information
there on the possibilities for synchronization or
programming of additional hand-held transmit-
ters.
When programming hand-held transmitters that
employ an alternating code, please observe the
following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
Do not exceed a distance of 164 ft/
50 m from the radio remote con-
trolled device.<
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step 5.
5. Press and hold the programmed memory
button 1 on the integrated universal remote
control for approx. 3 seconds.
If necessary, repeat the step up to three
times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
Clearing stored programs
Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx.
20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes: all stored
programs are cleared.
It is not possible to clear individual programs.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 1 in/2.5 cm to 3 in/8 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit key of the
original hand-held transmitter and release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Practical interior accessories
90
rapidly.
If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after
approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and
repeat this step.
Canada: if the LED is not flashing rapidly
after 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step or, if the programming was
interrupted by the hand-held transmitter,
press and hold the memory button and
press the button on the hand-held transmit-
ter for 2 seconds and release several times.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle to open the cover.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
Closing
Fold cover up.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent, close the glove compartment after
use while the vehicle is being driven.<
Ventilation*
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
glove compartment can be ventilated and, if the
cooling function
* is switched on, can also be
cooled.
Opening
Rotate the switch in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
Rotate the switch in the opposite direction of the
arrow until it is in the vertical position.
Depending on the temperature setting of the air
conditioner or the automatic climate control,
high temperatures may result in the glove com-
partment.
USB interface for data transmission*
Connection for importing data from a USB stor-
age device, e.g. software update, refer to
page 149.
The USB interface is located in the upper region
of the glove compartment.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not use force when plugging the connec-
tor into the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
> Do not connect USB hard discs.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Connection for external
audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over
the vehicle's speaker system, refer to the Enter-
tainment chapter starting on page 142.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories CONTROLS
91
Center armrest*
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats con-
tains either a compartment or the cover for the
mobile phone base plate
* or the snap-in
adapter
*.
Opening
Press the button, arrow, and lift the cover.
Storage compartments
In the vehicle interior
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find storage compartments in the front and
rear doors and in the center console
*.
Pockets
* are provided on the backrest rear pan-
els of the front seats.
Center Rail
On the Center Rail, a variety of accessories can
be fastened to a special base plate and moved
to various positions, e.g. a cupholder
* or a
mobile phone holder
*.
Do not attach accessory parts in the vicin-
ity of the parking brake; otherwise, they
can be damaged when the parking brake lever is
actuated.<
Example: cupholder
Inserting base plate
The lever 3 can be locked in three positions.
0 Locking
1 Sliding along the rail
2 Inserting base plate
For inserting, move the lever into position 2.
Sliding and locking
1. Push lever 3 into position 1.
2. Slide the base plate.
3. Push the lever 3 down, into position 0, and
lock the base plate in place.
Lock the base plate in place before driv-
ing; otherwise, injuries may result in the
event of an accident.<
Installing cupholder
1. Lock base plate in place if necessary, refer to
Sliding and locking.
2. Pull the lever 6 up to unlock the mounts.
3. First insert the cupholder into the front
mounts 4 and then snap it into the rear
mounts 5.
Make sure that the lever 6 is situated
opposite the mount 4.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CONTROLS Practical interior accessories
92
Clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in
the rear passenger compartment.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not
hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise,
they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in
case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
In the cargo area
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
have the following storage options:
> Storage compartment under the flat load
floor
*
> Bag holder on the support for the cargo area
cover
Cupholders and ashtray*
Cupholders*
Use lightweight, nonbreakable containers
and do not transport hot beverages. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Do not push unsuitable containers forcibly
into the cupholder. Otherwise, you may
damage it.<
Additional cupholders can be attached to the
Center Rail in the rear passenger compartment.
Ashtray*
The ashtray is located in one of the cupholders in
the center console.
Emptying
Remove the entire ashtray.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the key so
that children cannot operate the cigarette
lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your MINI, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as flashlights, car vacuum cleaners,
etc., up to approx. 140 watts at 12 volts, as long
as one of the following sockets is available.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Cigarette lighter socket
Remove the lighter* or cover from the socket.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories CONTROLS
93
Sockets*
In the rear passenger compartment
Pull out the cover.
In the cargo area
Pull out the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Drive Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communications
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
DRIVING TIPS
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
96
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed the following:
> Gasoline engine
4,500 rpm or 100 mph/160 km/h
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing liftgate
Only drive with the liftgate closed. Failure
to do so may endanger passengers or
other road users or may damage the vehicle in
the event of an accident or a braking and eva-
sive maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may
flow into the passenger compartment.<
If special circumstances make it absolutely nec-
essary to drive with the liftgate open:
1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof
*.
2. Switch off recirculated-air mode and switch
the airflow control of the air conditioner or
automatic climate control to high, refer to
page 84 or 86.
Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated on the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys-
tem, and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while park-
ing, take care to avoid possible contact between
the hot exhaust system and any highly flamma-
ble materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such
contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of seri-
ous personal injuries and property damage. Do
not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise,
there is a risk of burns.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
97
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, can
cause partial or complete loss of tire contact
with the road surface, so that the car cannot be
steered or braked properly.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining
tread depth on the tires, refer also to Tread
depth on page 195.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with
the clutch; use the parking brake. Other-
wise, greater clutch wear will result.<
For information on driving off using Hill Assist,
refer to page 69.
Braking safely
Your MINI is equipped with ABS. If you are in a
situation which requires full braking, it is best to
brake using maximum brake pressure. Since the
vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you
can still avoid possible obstacles with a mini-
mum of steering effort.
The pulsation of the brake pedal, together with
the sound of hydraulic regulation, indicates that
ABS is functioning properly.
Objects in the movement range of the
pedals
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving. Do not place additional
floor mats onto an existing one or onto other
objects. Only use floor mats that have been
approved for the vehicle and can be appropri-
ately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they have been
removed, e.g. for cleaning.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure
that this maneuver does not endanger other
road users. The heat generated in this process
helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that.
Then full braking force will be immediately avail-
able when it is needed.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Downshift-
ing during manual operation of the automatic
transmission, refer to page 49.
Never drive with the clutch held down,
with the transmission in neutral or with
the engine switched off; otherwise, engine brak-
ing action will not be present or there will be no
power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
98
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic climate
control is in operation, and then exits under the
vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are therefore normal.
In the MINI Cooper S, the coolant pump may
continue to run for some time after the engine is
switched off. This will generate noise in the
engine compartment.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can
assume the form of a sudden blowout.<
Avoid fluid spills in the cargo area as they
could damage the vehicle.<
Expanding cargo area
Cargo area cover
Do not place any objects on the cover;
otherwise, they could endanger the car's
occupants, e.g. in the case of braking or sudden
swerving, or they may damage the cover.<
When you open the liftgate, the roll-up cover is
raised.
To load bulky luggage, the cover can be
removed.
1. Unhook the lift straps from the liftgate.
2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it
rearward out of the bracket, arrow 2.
Rear seat backrest
Before folding down the rear seat back-
rests, ensure that the range of motion for
the backrests is unobstructed. Ensure that there
is no one within the range of motion of the back-
rest or that no one reaches into that region. Oth-
erwise, injury or damage can result.<
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the safety belt information on
page 40.<
Expand the cargo area by raising the split rear
seat backrests to a steeper angle.
The backrests can be adjusted as needed in
10 stages between a comfort position and a
transport position or can be folded down.
In the comfort position, the backrests are as far
back as possible; in the transport position, they
are in an approximately vertical position.
Before installing a child restraint system,
observe the instructions starting on page 43.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
99
1. Hold on to the backrest near the top, for
example on the headrest, and pull on the
loop, arrow.
2. Lock backrest in the desired position or fold
down.
Folding the backrests back into position
When folding the backrest, ensure that the
lock properly engages. Otherwise, for
example during braking and avoidance maneu-
vers, cargo can be thrown into the interior and
endanger the occupants.<
If the rear seat backrests are positioned at
a steeper angle, do not install child
restraint systems in the rear of the vehicle as
their protective features may be ineffective.<
When backrests are folded back from the
folded-down position, they lock in the transport
position.
To set the desired backrest angle or a comfort-
able position, pull the loop forward and adjust
the backrest.
Cargo area privacy screen
Between the cargo area and the rear seat back-
rest, there is a cargo area privacy screen. It can
be folded down and used as a loading platform.
When the rear seat backrests are folded
down, do not fold the privacy screen
upright. In an accident, cargo could fold down
the privacy screen and damage it.<
Folding down the privacy screen
1. If necessary, remove the cargo area cover,
refer to page 98.
2. Fold the privacy screen up and to the rear,
arrow 1.
3. Release the locking mechanisms on the left
and right sides, arrows 2.
4. Grasp the outer sides of the privacy screen
and guide it downward.
Do not exceed the maximum load of
330 lbs./150 kg of the privacy screen
when it is in folded down into the loading plat-
form position; otherwise, damage may occur.<
Folding the privacy screen forward
1. Fold down rear seat backrests.
2. Unlock privacy screen, see above.
3. Grasp the outer sides of the privacy screen
and guide it forward onto the folded-down
rear seat backrests.
Removing
1. Removing cargo area cover, page 98.
2. Fold the privacy screen up and to the rear
and unlock it, refer to Folding the privacy
screen forward.
3. Remove it from the guides on the cargo area
floor, arrows, and remove the privacy
screen.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
100
Flat load floor*
Do not exceed the maximum load of
150 kg for the load floor; otherwise, dam-
age may result.<
Access to the storage space
Under the load floor, there is storage space, e.g.,
for the cargo net
*.
1. Reach into the recess, arrow 1, at the back
edge of the load floor.
2. Lift up load floor behind and fold forwards,
arrow 2.
Before closing the liftgate, put the load floor
back on the cargo area floor.
Removing
If necessary, the load floor can be removed. To
do this, lift the load floor at the recess, fold up
and remove.
Cargo net*
Ensure that the cargo net is firmly
attached; otherwise, injuries may occur.<
Before installing
1. Remove the pouch with the cargo net from
the storage compartment under the pull-out
floor panel in the cargo area.
2. Remove the cargo net from the pouch, then
unroll and unfold it.
After use, fold the cargo net together, roll it
back up in the same way, and place it in the
pouch so that it can be stowed under the
floor panel again. When doing so, make sure
that hooks and tensioning buckles do not
rest against the rod elements.
3. Unfold the cargo net until the rod elements
snap into place.
Installing behind the front seats
1. If necessary, remove the cargo area cover.
2. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
Expanding cargo area.
3. Insert each cargo net mounting pin all the
way into its respective front mount in the
headliner, arrow 1, and push it forward.
4. Attach the hook, arrow 2, at the bottom of
each retaining strap to the respective eye on
the vehicle floor.
5. Lash the cargo net securely. To do so,
tighten the retaining straps at the tensioning
buckles.
Removing
When removing and stowing the cargo net, pro-
ceed in the reverse sequence.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
101
To fold closed, press the release button, arrow.
Bag holders*
Holders on the left and right side of the support
for the cargo area cover, arrow, e.g. for hanging
shopping bags or storage bags.
Only hang light shopping bags or suitable
items on the holders. Otherwise, this may
create a hazard due to flying objects, for exam-
ple in the event of braking and evasive maneu-
vers.
Transport heavy luggage only if it is appropri-
ately secured in the cargo area.<
Determining cargo limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs. or YYY kg. Otherwise, damage to
the vehicle and unstable driving conditions
may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX pounds or YYY
kilograms.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be four 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
102
Load
The permissible load is the sum of the occu-
pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The
greater the weight of the occupants, the less
cargo/luggage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
rear seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
respective opposite buckle.
> Do not stack higher than the top edge of the
backrests.
> Use the cargo net, refer to page 100. Ensure
that no objects can penetrate through the
net.
Securing cargo
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining or draw straps
*.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
* for securing larger
and heavier objects are available at your
MINI dealer.
> These cargo straps are fastened using eight
*
securing eyes.
Two of them are located on the side wall
*,
arrows 1, of the cargo area.
Two of them are located on the rear wall,
arrows 2, of the cargo area.
To use the lower lashing eyes, raise or remove
the pull-out floor panel.
Comply with the information enclosed with the
load-securing devices.
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerves are necessary.
Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle
weight and axle loads, page 226; otherwise, the
vehicle's operating safety is no longer assured
and the vehicle will not be in compliance with
the construction and use regulations.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants. Do not secure cargo using the fastening
points for the tether strap, page 44; they may
become damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
103
Roof-mounted luggage
rack*
A special rack system is available as an option for
your MINI. Your MINI dealer will be glad to
advise you. Comply with the installation instruc-
tions supplied with the rack system.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect
on vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 226.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom.
When loading, make sure that there is sufficient
space for the movement of the glass sunroof.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers, and take corners gently.
Rear luggage rack
A special rear-mounted luggage rack is available
as an optional accessory. It does not require a
trailer hitch.
Please comply with the precautions included
with the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located under the cov-
ers in the bumper.
Remove the covers, refer to page 220.
Loading rear luggage rack
When loading, make sure that you do not
exceed the approved gross vehicle weight and
axle loads.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 226.
Saving fuel
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif-
ferent factors. The implementation of certain
measures, your driving style and regular mainte-
nance can have an influence on fuel consump-
tion and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts no longer in use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof- or rear-mounted
luggage racks whenever you are not using
them.
Attached parts on the vehicle affect its aerody-
namics and increase fuel consumption.
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start-
ing on a long trip.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
104
Low inflation pressure increases rolling resis-
tance and thus leads to greater fuel consump-
tion and tire wear.
Drive off immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the
fastest way for the cold engine to reach its oper-
ating temperature.
Think ahead while driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. by
maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead.
Driving smoothly and anticipating impending
traffic situations reduces fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
Use first gear only for driving off. In second and
higher gears, accelerate smoothly to a suitable
engine and road speed. In doing so, avoid high
engine speeds and shift up early.
When you reach your desired traveling speed,
shift to the highest suitable gear and drive at
constant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red traffic light, take your
foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast
to a halt in the highest suitable gear.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the vehicle coast in a suitable
gear.
Fuel supply is shut off automatically when the
vehicle is coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy
stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or
in traffic jams.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. The man-
ufacturer of your MINI recommends having the
vehicle serviced by a MINI dealer. Also note the
MINI Maintenance System, page 202.
Driving on poor roads
Your MINI is at home on all roads and surfaces. It
combines an all-wheel drive system* with the
advantages of a normal passenger car.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other-
wise the vehicle may be damaged.<
When you are driving on poor roads, there are a
few points which you should strictly observe for
your own safety, for that of your passengers,
and for the safety of the vehicle:
> Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
beginning to drive and do not take risks
under any circumstances.
> Adapt your speed to road conditions. The
steeper and rougher the road surface is, the
lower the speed should be.
> When driving on very steep uphill or down-
hill grades, make sure in advance that the
engine oil and coolant levels are close to the
maximum mark, refer to page 199.
> While driving, watch carefully for obstacles
such as rocks or holes. Try to avoid these
obstacles whenever possible.
> Make sure that the undercarriage does not
touch the ground, for example on hilltops
and bumpy roads. The ground clearance of
the vehicle is a maximum of approx. 6.0 in/
15 cm. Please note that the ground clear-
ance can vary depending on loading and the
driving conditions of the vehicle.
> Only drive through road surface water up to
a maximum water depth of 1 ft/30 cm and
only at walking speed; do not remain sta-
tionary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
105
> After driving through water at low speed,
lightly press the brake pedal several times to
dry the brakes and to prevent the braking
effect from being reduced by wetness.
> Depending on the condition of the surface, it
may be practical to briefly activate DTC, refer
to DTC Dynamic Traction Control on
page 68.
> If the drive wheels spin on one side, depress
the accelerator pedal sufficiently so that the
driving stability control systems can distrib-
ute the drive forces to the individual wheels.
After driving on poor roads, please observe the
following points to maintain the driving safety of
the vehicle:
> Clean the coarsest dirt from the body.
> Clean mud, snow, ice, etc. from the wheels
and tires and check the tires for damage.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Follow Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
ENTERTAINMENT
Communications
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
NAVIGATION
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Navigation system
108
Navigation system
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre-
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of satel-
lites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide
you to every entered destination.
Enter data only with the vehicle station-
ary, and always give priority to the appli-
cable traffic regulations in the event of any con-
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.<
Navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.
You can obtain navigation data and an activa-
tion code from your MINI dealer.
Updating the data can take several hours,
depending on the volume of data.
> Update data while driving to reduce the
drain on the battery.
> The update is resumed automatically when
a trip is continued after an interruption.
> Only the main functions of the navigation
system are available during updating.
> You can inquire as to the status of the
update.
> The data are stored in the vehicle.
> After the updating process is complete, the
system restarts.
> The medium with the navigation data can be
removed after the update.
Information on navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
Information about the data version is displayed.
Updating the navigation data
1. Insert USB storage device with navigation
data
> into the USB interface in the glove com-
partment
*
> into the USB audio interface*.
2. Follow the instructions on the on-board
computer.
3. Enter the activation code of the USB storage
device.
4. Begin driving.
After you begin to drive, the system restarts and
updates the navigation data as you drive
*.
Selecting navigation
1. "Navigation"
During route guidance, an arrow view or a map
view is displayed on the on-board computer.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination entry NAVIGATION
109
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
> Manual destination entry, see below
> Selecting destination from address book,
page 111
> Last destinations, page 112
> Special destinations, refer to page 112
> Entering the destination via map, refer to
page 114
> Selecting home address, refer to page 112
> Entering destination via voice*, page 115
After selecting your destination you can proceed
to start the route guidance, page 118.
Manual destination
entry
To make it easier to enter town/city names and
street names, you are supported with the word-
match principle, refer to page 116. This makes it
possible to enter different spellings and com-
pletes your entry automatically so that stored
town/city names and street names can be
accessed quickly.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
The system also supports you with the following
features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town
or city.
> You can skip the entry of country and town/
city if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or displayed country.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or displayed
city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
To delete letters:
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Turn the MINI joystick to highlight
and press the MINI joystick.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Turn the MINI joystick to highlight
and press and hold the MINI joystick.
3. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
To enter spaces, if necessary:
Select the symbol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Destination entry
110
4. If necessary, move the MINI joystick to the
right and change to the list of towns and cit-
ies and select a name.
Entering the postal code*
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or displayed
city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the postal code.
6. Select the zip code.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street and intersection the same
way you entered the town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Move the MINI joystick to the right to
change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: entering street and house
number
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street the same way you entered
the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the digits.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
It is also possible to enter a street without enter-
ing a destination town/city. In this case all streets
of the entered country are offered for selection.
The related town/city is displayed after the
street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, this
entry can be canceled. This may be practical if
the desired street does not exist in the entered
destination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the currently displayed
country.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight street.
9. Select the street.
Starting route guidance after entering
the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion".
> Setting "Route preference", refer to
page 118.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination entry NAVIGATION
111
> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer to
page 112.
Address book
To generate contacts, refer to page 161 or
page 176.
Selecting a destination from the address
book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as des-
tinations.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone
* are not displayed, they must
first be checked as destinations, refer to
page 162 or page 177.
3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired,
using the "A-Z search".
4. If necessary, select Business address or
Home address.
Storing a destination in the address
book
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. Select Business address or Home address.
5. Enter "Last name" and "First name" if you
wish.
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
4. Depending on the selection, select an exist-
ing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Destination entry
112
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Using home address as destination
The home address must be stored as a destina-
tion. Refer to Setting contact as home address,
page 161 or page 178.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used as
a destination for route guidance.
Accessing last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Special destinations
You can search for a special destination, e.g. a
hotel or place of interest, and start route guid-
ance to the corresponding location.
The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of naviga-
tion data you are using.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination entry NAVIGATION
113
Accessing search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. Select "Points of Interest"
search.
A-Z search
1. "A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
3. "Category"
4. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details. Move the
MINI joystick to the left to exit category
details.
or
5. "Keyword"
6. Enter keyword.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
7. Select the special destination.
8. Select the symbol.
9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion".
If several details are stored, then you can
scroll through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
Category search
1. "Category search"
2. "Search destination"
3. Select or enter town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details. Move the
MINI joystick to the left to exit category
details.
7. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
8. Select the special destination.
Details are displayed.
9. Select the symbol.
10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion".
If several details are stored, then you can scroll
through the pages. If a phone number is avail-
able, a connection can be established, if desired.
Special destination location
As you input the search destination, you can
select from among various options.
> "At current location"
> "At destination"
> "At different location"
> With active route guidance: "Along route"
Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search"
2. A list of the special destinations is displayed.
> "At current location"
The special destinations are displayed in
order of their distance and are displayed
with a direction arrow pointing toward
the destination.
> "At destination", "At different location",
"Along route"
The special destinations are displayed in
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Destination entry
114
order of their distance from the search
point.
> Destinations of the selected category are
displayed in the map display as symbols.
The display depends on the map scale
and the category.
3. Highlight special destination.
4. Select the special destination.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion".
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations in
the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the settings.
Entering the destination
via map
If you only know the location of a destination or
street, then you can enter the destination with
the aid of the map.
Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The map shows the current position of the
vehicle.
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> Changing scale: turn the MINI joystick.
> Moving map: move the MINI joystick in
the corresponding direction.
> Shifting map diagonally: move the
MINI joystick in the corresponding direc-
tion and rotate the MINI joystick.
5. Press the MINI joystick to display additional
menu items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or
"Add as another destination".
> "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started.
Specifying the street
If the system does not detect any street, then a
street name in the vicinity or the coordinates of
the destination are displayed.
Additional functions
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. You
can also access other functions by pressing the
MINI joystick:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination entry NAVIGATION
115
> Select the symbol and "Start guid-
ance" if necessary.
> "Exit interactive map"
> Map display
> "Display destination"
The section of the map around the desti-
nation is displayed.
> "Display current location"
The section of the map around the cur-
rent position is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 112.
Entering destination via
voice*
General information
> Voice activation system, refer to page 21.
> When entering a destination by voice, it is
possible to switch between voice input and
the on-board computer.
> Having the possible spoken commands read
aloud: {Voice commands}
Saying the entries
> Countries, towns/cities, streets, and inter-
sections can be either spoken aloud as an
entire words or spelled in the system lan-
guage, refer to page 65.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
> Spell the entry if the language of the area is
different from the system language.
> Speak the letters smoothly and avoid exces-
sive emphasis and pauses.
Entering a town/city
The town/city can be spelled or entered as an
entire word
*.
The methods of entry depend on the nav-
igation data in use and the country and
language settings.<
2. Wait for the system prompt for the town/
city.
3. Say the name of the town/city or if neces-
sary, spell at least the first three letters.
Similar-sounding towns/cities that cannot
be differentiated by the system are com-
piled in a separate list and displayed as a town/
city followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired city/town in this list.<
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via the on-board computer:
1. {City} or {Spell city}.
4. Select city/town:
> To select a recommended town/city:
{Yes}
> Select other city/town: {New entry}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry …}
> To show other entries in the list:
{next page}
> Spell the entry: {Spell city}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Destination entry
116
Turn the MINI joystick until the destination is
selected, and press the MINI joystick.
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
way as the town/city.
Entering house number
Depending on the data in the navigation system,
house numbers up to the number 2,000 can be
entered:
Starting route guidance
Route guidance starts immediately.
Adding further intermediate
destinations
Further intermediate destinations can be added.
Saving destination
The destination is automatically added to the list
of the last destinations.
Planning a trip with
intermediate
destinations
New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be
entered for a trip. The trip destination must be
entered first, refer to Destination input,
page 109.
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
3. "Add as another destination"
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted.
Starting the trip
After entering all intermediate destinations:
"Start guidance"
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier to enter the names of towns or streets.
The system runs ongoing checks, comparing
your destination entries with the data stored in
the vehicle as the basis for instant response. The
user benefits include:
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
3. {Yes} to confirm the house number.
4. {Accept destination}
{Start guidance}
{Add as another destination}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination entry NAVIGATION
117
> Town/city names can also be entered differ-
ently from the official names if you use a
form that is customary in other countries.
Example:
Instead of "München", you can also enter
the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough let-
ters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. The system will not accept non
existent names and addresses.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Route guidance
118
Route guidance
Starting route guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Accept destination"
5. "Start guidance"
> The route is displayed on the on-board com-
puter.
> The distance to the destination/intermedi-
ate destination and the estimated time of
arrival are displayed in the map view.
> The arrow display is displayed on the on-
board computer, if so desired.
Terminating route
guidance
In the arrow or map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing route
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, route guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
> You can influence the calculated route by
selecting certain criteria.
> Route criteria can be changed during desti-
nation input and during route guidance.
> Street types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into account in route plan-
ning, e.g. avoiding highways.
> The proposed route can differ from personal
experience.
> The settings are stored for the remote con-
trol currently in use.
> Route guidance with traffic information,
refer to page 124.
Changing route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
> "Fast route": time-optimized route
through a combination of the least possi-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Route guidance NAVIGATION
119
ble distance and stretches of road that
allow rapid driving.
> "Efficient route": optimized combina-
tion of the fastest and shortest possible
route.
> "Short route": short distance without
taking time into account.
> "Alternative routes": suggestions of addi-
tional alternate routes during route guid-
ance.
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> "Avoid highways": avoid highways
where possible.
> "Avoid toll roads": avoid toll roads where
possible.
> "Avoid ferries": avoid ferries where possi-
ble.
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
If the route criteria "Avoid highways",
"Avoid toll roads", or "Avoid ferries" are
selected, then this can prolong the calculation
time for the route.<
Route
There are various views of the route available
during route guidance:
> Arrow display
> List of streets and towns/cities
> Map view, refer to page 120
Arrow display
The following information is displayed during
route guidance:
> Large arrow: current direction of travel.
> Small arrow: indicates the next change of
direction.
> Intersection view.
> Lane information.
> Traffic information.
> Distance to the next change of direction.
> Street name of the next change of direction.
Lane information
In the arrow display, the recommended lanes of
multi-lane roads are each marked with a trian-
gle.
> Filled triangle: optimum lane.
> Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It can,
however, also be possible to briefly make
additional lane changes.
List of roads or towns/cities on the route
If the route guidance has been started, then you
can display a list of the roads and towns/cities on
the route. The distance to be traveled and traffic
bulletins are displayed for each segment of the
route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Route guidance
120
Taking detours
During route guidance, prompt the navigation
system to bypass certain route segments. In
doing so, you will specify how many kilometers
to travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. Turn the MINI joystick: enter the desired
mileage.
5. Press the MINI joystick.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. "Remove blocking"
Recommended refueling
The remaining driving range is calculated, and
gas stations along the route are shown.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of gas stations is displayed.
4. Selecting a gas station.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance": the guidance to the
selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta-
tion is included in the route.
Map display
Displaying map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Overview
1 Toolbar
2 Route segment with traffic obstruction
3 Road sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
5 Current location
6 Upper status box
7 Lower status box
Lines on the map
In the map view, streets and roads are depicted
with different colors and lines according to their
classification. Dotted lines represent railroad
and ferry connections. National borders are
depicted with thin lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route identify
route segments with traffic obstructions,
depending on map scale. The direction of the tri-
angles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
Road signs classify the obstructions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Route guidance NAVIGATION
121
> Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the
planned route or direction of travel.
> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not
relate to the planned route or direction of
travel.
Traffic information, refer to page 122.
Planned route
After route guidance is started, the planned
route is displayed on the map.
Status boxes
Show/hide: press the MINI joystick.
> Upper status box: time, phone details, and
entertainment details.
> Lower status box: symbol for active route
guidance, traffic information status, arrival
time, and distance from destination.
Toolbar
The following functions are available directly in
the map view:
Changing map scale
"Interactive map"
> Moving map: move the MINI joystick in the
corresponding direction.
> Shifting map diagonally: move the
MINI joystick in the corresponding direction
and rotate the MINI joystick.
Changing scale
1. Select the symbol and press the MINI joy-
stick.
2. Changing scale: turn the MINI joystick.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map view facing north, turn the
MINI joystick in either direction until the scale
AUTO is displayed. The map shows the entire
path between the location and destination.
Settings for the map display
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
> "Day/night mode"
Select and adjust depending on light
conditions. If "Traffic conditions/gray
map" is activated, then this setting is not
taken into account.
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
*
The map is optimized for displaying traf-
fic bulletins. Symbols for the special des-
tinations are no longer displayed.
Displaying arrow view in map display
When route guidance is active, the arrow view
can be displayed additionally on the right side of
the map display.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
Symbol Function
Starting/stopping route
guidance
Switching voice instruc-
tions on/off
Changing route criteria or
selecting route alternatives
Searching for special desti-
nation
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Adjusting map views
or arrow display
Changing scale
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Route guidance
122
3. "Arrow display on map"
Destination guidance via
voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
The voice instructions can be switched on and
off during route guidance.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the MINI joystick twice.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces-
sary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction to
select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Traffic information*
Overview
In many congested areas, you can receive traffic
information that is transmitted by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During route guidance, the traffic information
relevant to the route you are planning to take is
automatically shown and taken into account in
route planning. Irrespective of whether route
guidance is active, you can have the traffic infor-
mation displayed in the map display or as an
event list.
The symbol in the toolbar of the map view
turns red if traffic information relates to the cal-
culated route.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain MINI models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to use
the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is
Symbol Meaning
Voice instructions switched
on
Voice instructions switched
off
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Route guidance NAVIGATION
123
in material breach of the terms and conditions
contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Chan-
nel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Network")
holds the rights to the traffic incident data and
RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered.
You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other
method to reproduce, duplicate, republish,
transmit or distribute in any way any portion of
traffic incident data. You agree to indemnify,
defend and hold harmless MINI of North Amer-
ica, LLC. ("MINI NA") and Total Traffic Network,
Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all
claims, damages, costs or other expenses that
arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unau-
thorized use of the traffic incident data or the
RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this
directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlaw-
ful activities by you in connection herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa-
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, MINI NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit-
ted by law, all warranties or representations with
respect to the licensed material (including, with-
out limitation, that the licensed material will be
error-free, will operate without interruption or
that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limita-
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-
pose, or those arising from a course of dealing or
usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
MINI NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
damages (including, without limitation, lost rev-
enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
MINI NA are aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so those particular limita-
tions may not apply to you.
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".
Accessing traffic information
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
"Traffic Info": traffic information for the sur-
rounding area is listed here. The symbol
turns red when traffic information relate to
the calculated route.
3. "Traffic Info"
First, traffic bulletins relating to the planned
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of
their distance from the current vehicle posi-
tion.
4. Select traffic information.
"More information": display additional
information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic informa-
tion if desired.
Traffic bulletins in the map
When the traffic info map is activated, the pic-
ture on the Control Display is switched to a gray-
scale. This permits an optimized depiction of
traffic information. The day/night mode is disre-
garded in this setting. The symbols for the spe-
cial destinations are no longer displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION Route guidance
124
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in map view
The symbols of traffic obstructions are displayed
differently, depending on the scale of the map
and location of the traffic obstruction in relation
to the route.
Additional information in the map
display
Depending on the map scale, the length, direc-
tion, and effects of a traffic obstruction are
depicted by traffic symbols in the map or by bars
along the planned route. The colors displayed
depend on the information sent by the traffic
information service.
> Red: traffic congestion
> Orange: stop-and-go traffic
> Yellow: heavy traffic
> Green: clear roads
> Gray: general traffic information such as
road construction
The colors displayed depend on the information
sent by the traffic information service.
Filtering of traffic bulletins
To set which traffic bulletins the system should
display:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins of the selected categories are
displayed.
> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
> For personal safety, traffic information that
indicates a potential hazard can not be hid-
den.
Route guidance with traffic information
Semi-dynamic route guidance
With traffic information reception switched on,
semi-dynamic route guidance is active.
The system takes into account the existing traffic
information during route guidance. A message is
displayed as a function of the route, the traffic
information, and the possible alternate routes.
The message displays the traffic information and
in the event of a traffic obstruction, suggests an
alternate route. The difference in distance and
time between the original route and the alter-
nate route are also displayed.
Taking an alternate route:
"Detour"
With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the road-
way, a message is displayed without a possible
alternate route.
It is also possible to take alternate routes can
also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed
via the list:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Route guidance NAVIGATION
125
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic route guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
> The system will not point out traffic obstruc-
tions on the original route.
> Traffic information will continue to be dis-
played on the map.
> Depending on the type of road and the
nature and length of the traffic obstruction,
the route can also be calculated so that you
travel through the traffic obstruction.
> Certain hazards are displayed regardless of
the setting.
To activate dynamic route guidance:
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NAVIGATION What to do if…
126
What to do if…
What to do if…
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position. Recep-
tion is best when you have an unobstructed
view to the sky.
> The route guidance does not accept an
address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and start
route guidance.
> The route guidance does not accept a desti-
nation?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
Stored data do not contain the data of the
destination. Select a destination that is as
close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in grayscale?
When the traffic info map is activated, the
picture on the Control Display is switched to
a grayscale. This permits an optimized
depiction of traffic information.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during route guidance?
The area has not been fully recorded yet, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu-
late a new route suggestion.
> The navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
What to do if… NAVIGATION
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Rock Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
Communications
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
ENTERTAINMENT
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT On/Off and tone
130
On/Off and tone
The following audio sources have shared control
elements and setting options:
> Radio
> CD player
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near the CD player
> On-board computer
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
Buttons near the CD player
1 Drive for audio CDs
2 Ejecting CD
3 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Selecting a track for the CD player.
4 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol-
ume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the radio
station or track set most recently is
played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
5 Changing the audio source
6 Selecting waveband
Switching on/off
Entertainment audio output
Press the knob.
This symbol at the upper edge of the Control
Display indicates that the sound output is
switched off.
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob to the desired volume.
The volume can also be adjusted on the steering
wheel, refer to page 10.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use; refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
On/Off and tone ENTERTAINMENT
131
Tone control
Various tone settings can be changed, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume con-
trol.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use; refer to Personal Profile,
page 26.
Treble, bass, balance, fader
> "Treble": treble adjustment.
> "Bass": bass adjustment.
> "Balance": volume distribution right/left.
> "Fader": volume distribution front/back.
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. Selecting the desired tone setting.
4. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.
5. To store: press the MINI joystick.
Volume levels
> "Speed volume": volume is adapted
depending on the speed
> "PDC"
*: volume of the PDC acoustic signal
relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the acoustic signal, e.g.
for the acoustic seat belt warning relative to
the entertainment sound output
> "Microphone"
*: volume of the microphone
during a phone conversation.
> "Loudspeak."
*: volume of the speaker dur-
ing a phone conversation.
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.
6. To store: press the MINI joystick.
Resetting tone settings
All tone settings can be reset to the default
value.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
132
Radio
Your radio is designed for reception of the fol-
lowing stations:
> FM and AM
> HD Radio
*
> Satellite radio*
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
Press the knob if the sound output is switched
off.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
The selected station is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing stations
Turn and press the MINI joystick
or
Press the button for the corresponding
direction
or
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. Select the frequency: turn the MINI joystick.
To store the station: press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
133
Storing stations
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the MINI joystick.
5. Select the desired memory location.
Press and hold the MINI joystick to save a radio
station that appears in the list of stations, but is
not being listened to.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Radio Data System RDS*
In the FM frequency range, additional informa-
tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con-
ditions are good, the station names are shown
on the Control Display. If the reception is weak
or disrupted, it can take some time before the
station names are displayed.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception*
Many radio stations transmit analog and digital
signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with improved sound quality.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under
U.S. and Foreign Patents licensed from iBiquity
Digital Corp. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Any time
shift between these two broadcasts can lead to
repetitions or interruptions in the output. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
134
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the art-
ist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
The symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. The sta-
tion names of the substations end in HD2, HD3,
etc.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted
for several seconds. If reception is interrupted
for an extended period, the radio switches back
to the main station.
Stored stations
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Satellite radio*
General information
The channels are offered in fixed packages.
Packages must be activated by telephone.
Navigation bar
Symbol Function
Changing list view
Selecting category
Entering channel directly
Time shift
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
135
Managing subscription
Clear reception is required for activating and
deactivating channels. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The
channel name is displayed in the status line.
Activating channels
The category Unsubscribed Channels includes all
channels that are not activated.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the category Unsubscribed Channels.
5. Select desired channel.
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Dial the telephone number to have the
channels activated.
This telephone number can also be used to
deactivate the channels.
Deactivating channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to activated channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Using the on-board computer
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
Accessing favorites, selecting
the My Favorites category
Managing favorites
Traffic Jump
Symbol Function
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
136
4. Select desired channel.
Using the buttons near the CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The next channel is selected.
Using direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until you reach the
desired channel and then press the MINI joy-
stick.
Storing channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or a desired category.
4. Select desired channel.
5. Press again.
6. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing list view
The list view changes each time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information about the channel is displayed.
Selecting category
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Time shift
Approximately one hour of the channel cur-
rently being listened to is temporarily stored in a
cache memory. Prerequisite: the signal must be
available.
The stored audio track can be played back at a
different time from the live broadcast. If the
cache memory is full, then the older tracks are
recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if a
new channel is selected.
Accessing Time shift
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
Symbol Function
Channel name
Artist
Track
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
137
3. "Replay - Time shift"
> The red arrow indicates the current playback
position.
> The time difference from the live broadcast
is displayed next to the cache memory bar.
> For live transmissions: "live".
Time shift menu
Automatic time shift
When the function is activated, audio playback is
stopped automatically in the event of:
> Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
> Activation of the voice activation system.
> Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
Activating
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
Deactivating
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Possible favorites include artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing artist, track, or game
Only current broadcasts can be stored as favor-
ites. The channel information must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the MINI joystick again.
6. Select artist, track, or game.
Storing league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
Symbol Function
Go to live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic time shift deacti-
vated/activated
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
138
5. Select the desired league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.
Accessing favorites
If an activated favorite is being played, the mes-
sage "Favorite alert!" appears for approx.
20 seconds.
Select "Favorites" while the alert message is
being displayed.
The displayed favorite will be played.
If it receives no notification, the system switches
into the My Favorites category. All of the favor-
ites currently being broadcast can be selected
from a list.
Managing favorites
Activating/deactivating favorites
Favorites can be activated or deactivated glo-
bally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region are broadcast at intervals of a few min-
utes.
Selecting region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating Jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
As soon as information about the selected
region becomes available, it is broadcast.
A new panel appears in the display.
Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update
of the names and positions of the channels. The
update occurs automatically and can take sev-
eral minutes.
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast
soon.
Information is currently being
broadcast.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
139
Notes
> Under some circumstances, reception may
not be possible, e.g. under certain environ-
mental or topographical conditions. The sat-
ellite radio has no influence on this.
> The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages or near trees, moun-
tains, or other powerful sources of radio
interference.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT CD player
140
CD player
General information
Inserting CD
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up. Die CD is automatically pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files, it
can take several minutes to the data, depending
on the folder structure.
Playable formats
CD player*
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC
Ejecting CD
Press the button on the CD player.
The CD will be slid a short distance out from the
drive.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
Selecting the track using the on-board
computer
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
3. Select the desired track. Press the
MINI joystick to start playback.
CDs with compressed audio files*
Depending on the data, it is possible that not all
indications on the CD will be correctly displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
3. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the MINI joystick to the left.
4. Select a track and press the MINI joystick.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CD player ENTERTAINMENT
141
Displaying information about the track*
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD
> Track file name
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD"
3. Select the desired CD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
CDs with compressed audio files:
The directories and the tracks contained therein
are played back in random sequence.
Switch off random play sequence: press the
MINI joystick.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Automatic replay*
Selected tracks, folders, or CDs are automatically
repeated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
142
External devices
Overview
AUX-IN connection
Overview
> It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.
MP3 players. Sound is output over the vehi-
cle speakers.
> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and
volume settings on the audio device. Tone
may depend on the quality of the audio files.
Connecting
1 USB interface
2 Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
For audio playback over the vehicle speakers,
connect the headphones or line-out connection
of the device to the AUX N connection 2.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. or "External devices" if applicable
3. "AUX front"
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output depends on the
audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting volume
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. or "External devices" if applicable
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn MINI joystick until the desired volume
is set and then press the MINI joystick.
Symbol Meaning
USB audio interface*
Mobile phone audio interface*
Bluetooth audio*
AUX-IN connection
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
143
USB audio interface*/
mobile phone audio
interface*
Overview
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They are operated using the on-board com-
puter. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
Options for connecting external devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
devices, USB devices such as MP3 players,
USB memory sticks, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
> Connection via the snap-in adapter
*, when
equipped with extended connectivity of the
music player in the mobile phone: Apple
iPhone or mobile phones. Playback is only
possible if no plug is present in the USB
audio interface.
Because of the large number of audio devices
available on the market, an operation via the
vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio
device/mobile phone.
Ask your MINI dealer for suitable audio devices/
mobile phones.
Audio files
Playback of standard audio files is possible:
> MP3
> WMA
> WAV (PCM)
> AAC
*, M4A*
> Without voice activation system: playback
lists: M3U
> With voice activation system: playback lists:
M3U, WPL
*, PLS*
Video files*
Playback of standard video files with a compati-
ble Apple device is possible:
> MPEG4
> H.264
Connect via the USB audio interface
1 USB interface
2 Connection for audio/video playback:
TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
Apple device
A special adapter cable* is available for con-
necting the Apple device. The adapter cable is
required for a proper connection.
Further information:
> at: www.mini.com/connectivity
> at your MINI dealer.
For audio playback over the vehicle speakers,
connect the Apple device using the special
adapter cable with AV-IN connection 2 and USB
interface 1 or using a flexible adapter cable
*
with a USB interface 1.
The USB audio interface supports the menu
structure of the Apple device.
USB device
To protect the USB interface and USB device
from mechanical damage, connect them with a
flexible adapter cable.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface 1.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
144
After initial connection
Track information, e.g. artist or music style and
the playlists of the USB device are imported into
the vehicle. This process can take some time.
The time required is dependent on the USB
device and on the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be accessed
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
The data from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 26,000 tracks can be stored in the vehi-
cle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than
26,000 tracks are stored, then the data of exist-
ing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man-
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Audio playback
Starting audio playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol and press the
MINI joystick.
Playback begins with the first track.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
> Playback lists
> Information: music style, artist, album, track.
> Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer.
Track titles are displayed if they have been
stored in the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre",
Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired
input. When a letter is entered, the
results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis-
played.
6. "Play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
145
Playback lists
To open playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random play sequence
The current list of tracks is played in random
sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Video playback*
The video image on the on-board monitor is dis-
played when the vehicle is standing still; in some
countries only when the hand brake is engaged
or if the transmission is set on P.
For video playback, connect the Apple device to
the USB audio interface using the video-enabled
adapter cable
*.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol and press the MINI joy-
stick.
4. "Video"
5. Selecting the desired file.
Select category in file directory, if applicable.
6. Press the MINI joystick.
The playback of the selected video file is
started.
Notes
Do not subject the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper-
ating instructions for the audio device. Other-
wise the audio device may be damaged, impair-
ing driving safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.
Information on connection
> The connected audio device is supplied with
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
device. Therefore, do not connect the device
to the power socket in the vehicle.
> Do not use force when plugging the connec-
tor into the USB interface.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
146
> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or
lamps, to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
recharge external devices.
Bluetooth audio*
Overview
> It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music
files from external devices, e.g. audio
devices or mobile phones.
> Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
> The volume of the sound output depends on
the device. If necessary, change the volume
setting on the device.
> Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
> Suitable device. Information is available at
www.mini.com/connectivity.
> Device operational.
> Ignition switched on.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 164, and in the device.
> Bluetooth presets in the device are required,
e.g. connection not confirmed or visible,
refer to Owner's Manual for the device.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the Blue-
tooth passkey. Only required once for pair-
ing.
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the device when the vehicle is
stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead
to endangerment of passengers or other road
users.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. or "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
5. To perform other operations on the device,
refer to the operating instructions for the
device: e.g. search for and connect Blue-
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device's display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device's display.
The on-board computer or the device will
prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth
passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".
9. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the device is dis-
played as connected.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
147
symbol displayed in white: device is active as
an audio source.
If the pairing was not successful: what to do if…,
refer to page 148.
Connecting a particular device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connection is not possible if a data exchange is
currently taking place via a mobile phone that is
connected via Bluetooth.
Prerequisite
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired
devices.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. or "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Connecting a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. or "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
symbol displayed in white: device is active as
an audio source.
Playback
General information
> The display of track information depends on
the device.
> Operation via the device or the on-board
computer are both possible.
> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange
takes place via a mobile phone that is con-
nected via Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1. Connect device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired track from the list.
Playback menu*
Depending on the device, all functions may not
be available.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous track
Reverse: press and hold the sym-
bol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
148
Track search*
Depending on the device, it is possible to search
by track.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Search device content"
5. "A-Z search"
6. Select desired entry or directory.
Player program*
Depending on the device, there may be various
programs for playing music files.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Select player"
6. Select the desired program.
Disconnecting an audio connection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Select the desired device from the list of con-
nected devices.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. Deactivate "Audio".
7. "OK"
With a mobile phone, only the audio connection
is disconnected. All other connections remain
active.
Unpairing device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. or "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
Information about suitable devices is available
at www.mini.com/connectivity.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 163.
> Device not supported by vehicle.
If necessary, perform a software update
*,
refer to page 149.
> Device could not be paired or connected.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey
on the device and via the on-board com-
puter.
Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary,
delete the connections with other devices.
Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
Is the device no longer responding? Switch
the device off and back on again.
Repeat the pairing procedure.
> No music can be played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
149
Start the program for playing music files on
the device and if necessary, select a track via
the device.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
> Music files only play quietly.
Adjust volume settings on the device.
> Videos cannot be played or can only be
played with a delayed audio output.
Check the device compatibility. Information
is available at www.mini.com/connectivity.
> Playback is interrupted by the press of a but-
ton or other messages on the device.
Switch off key tones and other acoustic sig-
nal on the device.
> Playback is interrupted by a phone call or
traffic report and does not automatically
continue.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
> Playback is not possible when the mobile
phone is connected via Bluetooth audio and
at the same time via the extended connec-
tivity of the music player in the mobile
phone
*.
Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g.
the audio connection, refer to page 148,
and start playback again.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function please
contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.
Software update*
The vehicle supports various external devices,
depending on the software it is currently using.
A software update can enable the vehicle to
support, for example, new mobile phones or
new external devices.
Software updates and associated, up-to-date
instructions are available on the web page
www.mini.com/connectivity.
Displaying current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
Select the desired version
* to display additional
information
*.
Updating software
The software update can only be performed
when stopped.
1. Save the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB data storage device.
2. Connect the USB data storage device to the
USB interface of the USB audio interface in
the center console. It is not possible to per-
form the update using the USB interface in
the glove compartment.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update"
7. "OK"
All of the listed software updates are installed.
Reinstalling previous version
If necessary, it is possible to restore the system
to the software version prior to the last software
update.
The restoring to the previous version can only be
performed when stopped.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ENTERTAINMENT External devices
150
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. Select "OK" twice.
All of the listed software updates are removed.
Note
MINI Connected*, Office functions, and con-
nected devices may temporarily be unavailable
during a software update or while restoring to
the previous version. Wait a few minutes until
the functions are available once more.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
External devices ENTERTAINMENT
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Connect Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Hands-free device Bluetooth
154
Hands-free device Bluetooth
Overview
The concept
Mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle
through Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth® SIG, Inc.
After being paired once, when the ignition is
switched on, these devices are automatically
detected as soon as they are present in the vehi-
cle and can be controlled via the on-board com-
puter, the buttons on the steering wheel, and by
voice
*.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired.
It may be necessary for some functions to be
activated by the mobile phone provider.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in
your hand while you are driving; use the hands-
free system instead. If you do not observe this
precaution, your being distracted can endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Precise information as to which mobile phones
and hands-free devices are supported can be
found at www.mini.com/connectivity.
With a certain software version, these suitable
mobile phones support the vehicle functions
described below.
With other mobile phones or software versions,
malfunctions may occur.
A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
should not be operated via the mobile phone
keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
Displaying vehicle identification number
and software part number
To check which mobile phones are supported by
the hands-free device, the vehicle identification
number and the software part number will be
required. The software version of the mobile
phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
Pairing/unpairing mobile
phone
Requirements
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 154.
> Mobile phone operational.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 154, and in the mobile phone.
> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the Blue-
tooth passkey. Only required once for pair-
ing.
> Ignition switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Hands-free device Bluetooth Communications
155
3. "Bluetooth®"
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the mobile phone when the
vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention
may lead to endangerment of passengers or
other road users.<
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
4. To perform other operations on the mobile
phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone: e.g. search for and connect
Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
The on-board computer or the mobile
phone will prompt you to enter the same
Bluetooth passkey.
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
7. Select the device options that are to be used
for the mobile phone.
8. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
If the pairing was not successful: what to do if…,
refer to page 156.
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> After identification, phone book entries are
imported from the mobile phone and/or SIM
card
* of the telephone, depending on the
telephone.
> Four mobile phones can be paired.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the mobile
phone operating instructions.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. A different mobile phone can
be connected by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Hands-free device Bluetooth
156
3. Select the mobile phone to be connected.
Unpairing mobile phone
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer
to page 154.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con-
nected.
> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and in the mobile phone.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
the on-board computer.
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone using a charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
them are displayed, or they are displayed
incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
yet completed.
> It is possible that only the phone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
*
are transferred.
> It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
> The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
> Is the amount of data for the contact too
large, e.g., because of stored information
such as addresses? Reduce the number of
data entries.
The telephone connection quality is low.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi-
ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
signal.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function please
contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Hands-free device Bluetooth Communications
157
Operation
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
reached.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, then
the name and number of the contact are dis-
played; otherwise, only the number is displayed.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone
number, then only the name of the caller is
transmitted.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
"Accept"
Callrejecting
"Reject"
The caller is redirected to the mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "End call"
Entering phone numbers
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
It is also possible to enter phone numbers by
voice.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Hands-free device Bluetooth
158
Calls with multiple parties
General information
It is possible to switch between two calls and to
connect two calls to form a conference call.
These functions must be supported by the
mobile phone and by the service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
need to be adjusted for this.
When a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put on
hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
"Return"
The conversion that was on hold is continued.
Switching between two calls, toggling
Active call: highlighted.
The call on hold is identified with:
"on hold...".
Select the symbol to switch to the call on
hold
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
Both calls are always ended when a conference
call is terminated. If one call is terminated by
another party, the other call can be continued.
Muting the microphone*
The microphone can be muted in active calls.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
The muted microphone is automatically acti-
vated:
> If a new call is made.
> When switching between callers on hold.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Hands-free device Bluetooth Communications
159
Keypad dialing
Use keypad dialing to gain access to network
services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely
access an answering machine. This requires the
DTMF code.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select contact from a list or
"Dial number"
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via the on-board com-
puter.
During an ongoing conference call, DTMF dialing
is not possible.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts of the
telephone and shows all contacts for which a
phone number is entered. The entries can be
selected to make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 161.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
Select the symbol. Contact with one
phone number. The connection is estab-
lished.
2. Select the symbol. Contact with more than
one phone number. Select phone number,
the connection is established.
Call not possible, the mobile phone has no
reception or network.
Editing a contact
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
To redial
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the telephone are
transferred to the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. The last 20 phone numbers
dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone
numbers depends on the mobile phone.
Selecting the number using the on-
board computer
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Hands-free device Bluetooth
160
3. Select the desired entry and phone number,
if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries*
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact" if necessary
Received calls
Displaying calls
The list of received calls in the telephone is
transferred into the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. The last 20 calls received are dis-
played. The sorting and displaying of phone
numbers depends on the mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries*
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact" if necessary
Messages*
General information
The displaying of text messages depends on
whether the mobile phone supports transmis-
sion to the vehicle. Text messages may not be
supported by the service provider or the func-
tion may have to be separately activated. After a
mobile phone is paired for the first time, the
transmission may take several minutes. Mes-
sages are only displayed completely when the
vehicle is stopped.
Displaying messages
1. "Telephone"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
Hands-free system
General information
Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys-
tem can be continued using the mobile phone
and vice versa.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Hands-free device Bluetooth Communications
161
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is
automatically switched to hands-free mode.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the dis-
play of the mobile phone, also refer to the
Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys-
tem can also be continued using the mobile
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile
phone.
At this point, follow the instructions that appear
on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to
the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
Contacts*
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The
addresses can be used as destinations for navi-
gation.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields"
4. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
5. Inputting text, refer to page 20.
When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that route guidance is possible for all
addresses.
6. "Store" if necessary
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
Listing all contacts from the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Hands-free device Bluetooth
162
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entry.
4. Move the MINI joystick to the left.
5. "Yes"
If a contact that comes from a mobile phone is
changed, the changes are not stored in the
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in
the vehicle, and only this copy is displayed.
Under certain conditions, an identical contact
entry is generated.
Selecting a contact as a destination*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion"
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
Selecting name sorting*
Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a desti-
nation
*.
Mobile phone
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth Communications
163
Mobile phone preparation
Bluetooth
Overview
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g.
audio players, can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth® SIG, Inc.
After being paired once, when the ignition is
switched on, these devices are automatically
detected as soon as they are present in the vehi-
cle and can be controlled via the on-board com-
puter, the buttons on the steering wheel, and by
voice
*.
Depending on whether they are functioning as a
telephone and/or as an audio source, external
devices can be used via the vehicle. The tele-
phone functions will be described below. Oper-
ation of audio functions, refer to page 146.
It may be necessary for some functions to be
activated by the mobile phone provider.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in
your hand while you are driving; use the hands-
free system instead. If you do not observe this
precaution, your being distracted can endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Snap-in adapter*
The snap-in adapter, refer to page 174, makes it
possible to:
> Accommodate the mobile phone.
> Recharge its battery.
> Connect it to an external antenna of the
vehicle.
This assures a better network connection
and constant sound quality.
A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
should not be operated via the mobile phone
keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
Suitable mobile phones
For precise information as to which mobile
phones and external devices with Bluetooth
interfaces are supported by the mobile phone
preparation, go to www.mini.com/connectivity.
With a certain software version, these suitable
mobile phones support the vehicle functions
described below.
With other mobile phones or software versions,
malfunctions may occur.
It is possible to perform a software update
*,
refer to page 149.
Displaying vehicle identification number
and software part number
Checking which mobile phones are supported
by the mobile phone preparation requires the
vehicle identification number and software part
number. The software version of the mobile
phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
Pairing/unpairing mobile
phone
Overview
> Using a mobile phone as a telephone.
> Using a mobile phone as an auxiliary
phone
*.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
164
> Using a mobile phone as an audio source*.
> Using an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 146.
Functions supported by the mobile phone and
audio device are displayed as symbols during
the pairing.
White symbol: function active.
Gray symbol: function inactive.
Up to four external devices can be paired. Two
devices can be connected to the vehicle at a
time and used for different functions. The phone
can be used to perform all of the following
phone functions.
Requirements
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 163.
> Mobile phone operational.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 164, and in the mobile phone.
> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone.
> If necessary, deactivate the audio connec-
tion, refer to page 164.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the Blue-
tooth passkey. Only required once for pair-
ing.
> Ignition switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating* additional
functions
To use these functions in the vehicle, activate
them before pairing. For information on suitable
mobile phones that support this function, refer
to page 163.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
Bluetooth audio
Use a mobile phone as a telephone and as an
audio device in the vehicle.
"Bluetooth® audio"
To use a mobile phone exclusively as a tele-
phone in the vehicle, deactivate the function
and reconnect the mobile phone.
Office
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes-
sages, and emails are imported from the mobile
phone into the vehicle.
"Office"
Auxiliary phone*
Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be
accepted, refer to page 168. Missed calls to the
auxiliary phone can be shown in the Control Dis-
play.
Symbol Function
Telephone
Auxiliary phone
*
Audio source*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth Communications
165
Another mobile phone can be used as an auxil-
iary phone.
"Additional telephone"
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the mobile phone when the
vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention
may lead to endangerment of passengers or
other road users.<
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
4. To perform other operations on the mobile
phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone: e.g. search for and connect
Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
The on-board computer or the mobile
phone will prompt you to enter the same
Bluetooth passkey.
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
7. Select the device options that are to be used
for the mobile phone.
8. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
If the pairing was not successful: what to do if…,
refer to page 167.
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or radio readi-
ness is switched on.
> After identification, phone book entries are
imported from the mobile phone and/or SIM
card
* of the telephone, depending on the
telephone.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the mobile
phone operating instructions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
166
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. A different mobile phone can
be connected by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Select the mobile phone to be connected.
The assigned functions before the unpairing of
the mobile phone are assigned to the mobile
phone when it is reconnected. If a mobile phone
is already connected, then these functions are
deactivated if necessary.
Device options*
Device options in devices that are paired and
connected can be activated or deactivated.
Configuring device
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the device to be configured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. Activate/deactivate functions. At least one
function must be selected.
> "Telephone"
> "Additional telephone"
> "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a device is assigned a function, this may deac-
tivate the function in an already connected
device and cause the other device to be
unpaired.
Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary
phone
If the telephone and auxiliary phone are con-
nected to the vehicle, the function can be
swapped between the two devices.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Using the mobile phone as an audio
source
Using the audio-capable mobile phone as an
audio source. Activate Bluetooth audio, refer to
page 164.
Activating and connecting mobile phone in vehi-
cle, refer to page 165.
The mobile phone is used as an audio source if
no other device is connected as an audio source.
If a device is already connected as an audio
source:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth Communications
167
1. Activating and connecting mobile phone in
vehicle, refer to page 165.
2. "Use for audio"
The mobile phone is connected as an audio
source. The previous audio source is no
longer connected to the vehicle.
Unpairing device
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired mobile phones are listed.
3. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer
to page 163.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con-
nected.
> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and in the mobile phone.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
the on-board computer.
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> Is the audio connection activated? Deacti-
vate the audio connection.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter
* or via
a charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Telephone functions not possible.
> Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary
phone and is the auxiliary phone function
deactivated? Activate the function.
> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the
mobile phone as a telephone.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
them are displayed, or they are displayed
incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
yet completed.
> It is possible that only the phone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
*
are transferred.
> It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
> The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
> The data volume of the phone book entry is
too great, e.g. due to additionally stored
information such as notes? Reduce the data
volume.
> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or auxiliary phone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
The telephone connection quality is low.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
168
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi-
ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
signal.
> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter
* or place it in the vicinity of the cen-
ter console.
> Adjust the volume of the microphone and
speaker separately.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function please
contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.
Operation
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
reached.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the mobile phone and the
volume of the person on the phone with you.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may be nec-
essary to adjust the volumes.
Adjustments are only possible during a call and
must be carried out separately for each phone.
When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes the
settings.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. To select the desired setting:
"Microphone" or "Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.
6. To store: press the MINI joystick.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, then
the name and number of the contact are dis-
played; otherwise, only the number is displayed.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone
number, then only the name of the caller is
transmitted.
With calls to the auxiliary phone, only the num-
ber is displayed if it is transmitted by the net-
work.
An incoming call to the auxiliary phone is auto-
matically rejected if a call with the phone is cur-
rently active.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is redirected to the mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth Communications
169
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "End call"
Entering phone numbers
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
It is also possible to enter phone numbers by
voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
It is possible to switch between two calls and to
connect two calls to form a conference call.
These functions must be supported by the
mobile phone and by the service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
need to be adjusted for this.
When a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put on
hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, toggling
Active call: highlighted.
The call on hold is identified with:
"on hold...".
Select the symbol to switch to the call on
hold
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
170
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
Both calls are always ended when a conference
call is terminated. If one call is terminated by
another party, the other call can be continued.
Muting the microphone*
The microphone can be muted in active calls.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
The muted microphone is automatically acti-
vated:
> If a new call is made.
> When switching between callers on hold.
Keypad dialing
Use keypad dialing to gain access to network
services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely
access an answering machine. This requires the
DTMF code.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select contact from a list or
"Dial number"
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via the on-board com-
puter.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts of the
telephone and shows all contacts for which a
phone number is entered. The entries can be
selected to make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 176.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
Select the symbol. Contact with one
phone number. The connection is estab-
lished.
2. Select the symbol. Contact with more than
one phone number. Select phone number,
the connection is established.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth Communications
171
Call not possible, the mobile phone has no
reception or network.
Editing a contact
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
To redial
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the telephone are
transferred to the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. The last 20 phone numbers
dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone
numbers depends on the mobile phone.
Selecting the number using the on-
board computer
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and phone number,
if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries*
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact" if necessary
Received calls
Displaying calls
The list of received calls in the telephone is
transferred into the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. The last 20 calls received are dis-
played. The sorting and displaying of phone
numbers depends on the mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries*
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
172
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact" if necessary
Hands-free system
General information
Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys-
tem can be continued using the mobile phone
and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is
automatically switched to hands-free mode.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the dis-
play of the mobile phone, also refer to the
Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys-
tem can also be continued using the mobile
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile
phone.
At this point, follow the instructions that appear
on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to
the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
Operation by voice*
Equipped with voice activation system: opera-
tion, refer to page 21. For the list with the short
commands, refer to page 227, does not apply
for this type of voice operation.
Without voice activation system: depending
upon the equipment, the mobile phone can be
voice-operated as described below.
The concept
> The mobile phone can be operated without
removing your hand from the steering
wheel.
> In many cases, the entry process is sup-
ported by means of announcements or
questions.
> {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
> {{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
vation system.
Voice commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say the command.
Finishing voice input
Press the button on the steering wheel
briefly
or
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Possible commands are read aloud.
{Cancel}.
{Help}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth Communications
173
Each digit can be spoken individually or com-
bined into a sequence to accelerate the entry
process.
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Example: dialing phone numbers
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. {Dial number}
3. The system replies: {{Please say the num-
ber}}
4. For example: {123 456 7890}
5. The system replies: {{123 456 7890. Con-
tinue?}}
6. {Dial}
The system replies: {{Dialing number}}
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone number
Digit sequences can be deleted after the system
has repeated the digits.
The command can be repeated as often as nec-
essary.
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Redialing
Voice phone book*
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The entries must be entered by voice and are
independent of the mobile phone's memory. Up
to 50 entries can be set up.
Storing the entry
Deleting the entry
Deleting all entries
To listen to and select the entries:
Selecting an entry
{Dial name} or {Name}.
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
{Delete}.
{Redial}.
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name aloud. Do not exceed a
speaking duration of about 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. {Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. Say {Dial number} when the desired
entry is read.
1. {Dial name}.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth
174
Adjusting volume
Turn knob during announcement.
> The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
> The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an emergency call. In stressful situations, the
voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tele-
phone connection.
Ambient conditions
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha-
sis and speed.
> Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system. The language
for voice operation is preset and can not be
changed over the Control Display.
> Keep doors, windows, glass sunroof
*/pan-
oramic sunroof
*, or convertible top* closed
to avoid noise interference.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Snap-in adapter*
Installation location
In the center armrest.
Inserting snap-in adapter
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front,
arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until
it clicks into place.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be
necessary to remove the protective cap of
the antenna connector and from the USB
connection of the mobile phone.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons fac-
ing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth Communications
175
Removing mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Office
176
Office
Overview
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, and text
messages can be displayed using the Control
Display if the mobile phone compatibly supports
these functions and the required Bluetooth
radio standards.
For information about which mobile phones and
functions are available, go to www.mini.com/
connectivity.
A limited number of compatible mobile phones
are available for Office.
Contents are only displayed completely when
the vehicle is stopped.
Only read access to the mobile phone is possi-
ble.
Do not use Office while driving. Make
entries only when traffic and road condi-
tions permit; otherwise, you may endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users by being
distracted.<
Requirements
> A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, the data access to the mobile
phone must be confirmed.
> Time zones, time, and date, refer to
page 61, are correctly adjusted on the Con-
trol Display and on the mobile phone in
order, for example, to correctly display
appointments.
Updating
Every time that the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle, data are updated. Deadlines,
tasks, notes and reminders can be updated sep-
arately.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Data from the mobile phone are re-trans-
mitted to the vehicle.
Current office
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as upcoming appointments are dis-
played.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Selecting the desired entry to display details
Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The con-
tacts from the mobile phone
* are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be used as destina-
tions for navigation and the phone numbers can
be dialed.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Office Communications
177
Displaying contacts
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Dialing a phone number*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entry.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
If a contact is changed, the changes are not
stored in the mobile phone
*. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is dis-
played.
Selecting a contact as a destination*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select address.
With contacts from the mobile phone
*, the
address must be compared with the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina-
tion"
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a desti-
nation.
Mobile phone
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Office
178
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone
numbers, 2 addresses, 3 email addresses, and
one Internet address.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "New contact"
5. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields"
6. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
7. Enter text assign a contact type, refer to
page 178.
8. When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that route guidance is possible for all
addresses.
9. "Accept address" if necessary
10. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Phone numbers and addresses can be assigned
various contact types.
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting name sorting*
Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "Contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored in
the mobile phone, the sorting of names can dif-
fer from the sorting selected.
Displaying contact pictures*
Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the
vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to
the vehicle. The number of pictures transmitted
depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function.
Symbol Meaning
Private phone number
Business phone number
Mobile phone number
Other phone number
Private address
Business address
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Office Communications
179
1. "Contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Show images"
The display of all contact pictures is activated or
deactivated.
Exporting/importing contacts*
Contacts can be exported and imported using
Personal Profile, refer to page 26. Depending on
which ignition key is in use, only contacts that
are stored in the vehicle are stored.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
*
cannot be deleted.
1. "Contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. "Options"
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Messages
General information
The displaying of text messages depends on
whether the mobile phone supports transmis-
sion to the vehicle. Text messages may not be
supported by the service provider or the func-
tion may have to be separately activated. After a
mobile phone is paired for the first time, the
transmission may take several minutes. Mes-
sages are only displayed completely when the
vehicle is stopped. Messages from the auxiliary
phone are not transmitted.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
Message type
A symbol indicates the type of message.
Read message.
Unread message.
Reading message aloud
Reading text messages aloud, refer to page 182.
Text message
Calling a text message sender
1. Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
Saving sender in the contacts
1. Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Calendar
Displaying calendar
Appointments from the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Calendar"
Appointments of the current day are dis-
played.
Symbol Message type
Text message
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Office
180
Selecting calendar day
1. Select date.
2. Select desired day or date.
> "Next day"
> "Date:"
> "Previous day"
> "Today"
Displaying appointment
1. Select the desired appointment.
2. To scroll through appointment, if necessary:
> Turn the MINI joystick.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
If the appointment contains phone numbers or
email addresses, then these can be used directly
or stored in the contacts.
1. "Use contact data"
2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:
> Select a contact to display a detailed view
of the contact.
> Select a phone number to directly estab-
lish a connection.
Storing contact data
1. "Use contact data"
2. Highlight a phone number or email address.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading an appointment aloud
Reading an appointment aloud, refer to
page 182.
Tasks
Displaying task list
Display open tasks that must be completed
within the next 90 days.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting task list
1. Select the top line in the task list.
2. To select sorting criterion:
> "Priority (!)"
> "Subject"
> "Due date"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Office Communications
181
Displaying task
1. Select the desired task.
2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:
> Turn the MINI joystick.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
If the task contains phone numbers or email
addresses, then these can be used directly or
stored in the contacts.
1. "Use contact data"
2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:
> Select a contact to display a detailed view
of the contact.
> Select a phone number to directly estab-
lish a connection.
Storing contact data
1. Highlight a phone number or email address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading a task aloud
Reading a task aloud, refer to page 182.
Notes
Displaying notes
1. "Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying a note
1. Select the desired note.
2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:
> Turn the MINI joystick.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
If the note contains phone numbers or email
addresses, then these can be used directly or
stored in the contacts.
1. "Use contact data"
2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:
> Select a contact to display a detailed view
of the contact.
> Select a phone number to directly estab-
lish a connection.
Storing contact data
1. Highlight a phone number or email address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading a note aloud
Reading a note aloud, refer to page 182.
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders for imminent appointments and
tasks are displayed. After an appointment has
passed or a task is due, the reminder is deleted.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications Office
182
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The associated appointment or task is displayed.
Reading aloud
Text messages, appointment entries, tasks, and
notes can be read aloud to you.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
While the message is being read aloud, you have
the following options:
> "Pause"
Interrupt the reading. Select again to
resume the reading.
> "Back to beginning"
Read message again from the beginning.
> Select the symbol.
Skip back one paragraph.
> Select the symbol.
Skip over a paragraph.
> To terminate the reading, move the
MINI joystick to the left.
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones, refer
to page 163.
> Appointments, tasks, notes, or text mes-
sages are not being displayed?
The mobile phone is not suitable for the
missing function or is not correctly con-
nected.
The mobile phone is connected as an auxil-
iary phone.
The Office function is deactivated.
The appointments are older than 20 days
and are more than 50 days in the future.
The tasks have been marked as completed
or are more than 90 days in the future.
Depending on the number of appointments,
tasks, notes, and messages stored in the
mobile phone, not all of them are displayed
in the vehicle.
> Appointments or tasks from the mobile
phone are not being displayed at the correct
time?
The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set
in the Control Display and in the mobile
phone.
> Texts of entries are not displayed com-
pletely?
Texts are already shortened by the mobile
phone.
Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle can take a few minutes.
> Contact pictures are not being displayed?
Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be
stored in the vehicle.
> If you have gone through all items in the list
and still cannot activate the desired function
please contact the Hotline or your MINI
dealer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MINI Connected Communications
183
MINI Connected
Overview
The concept
You can use MINI Connected to integrate certain
software applications of a suitable mobile phone
into your MINI. These software applications are
displayed on the Control Display. They are oper-
ated using the MINI joystick.
The range of software applications can be coun-
try-specific.
Requirements
The following requirements must be met for the
function of MINI Connected:
> The operating system of the mobile phone
must support the software applications of
MINI Connected.
> The software applications are installed on
the mobile phone and are operational.
> Suitable mobile phone
> Appropriate mobile phone contract.
Possible additional costs incurred are not
included with MINI Connected.
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. If you do not
observe this precaution, your being distracted
can endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.
For safety reasons, some software applications
can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<
Only use software applications approved
by the manufacturer of your MINI; other-
wise, malfunctions may result.<
Notes
For information on suitable mobile phones,
available software applications, and their instal-
lation:
> at: www.mini.com/connectivity
> at your MINI dealer.
Connecting a mobile
phone
Connect via the USB audio interface
1 USB interface
2 Connection for audio/video playback:
TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
Connect the mobile phone using the special
connecting cable, available at your MINI dealer,
to the USB interface 1 and the AV-IN
connection 2.
To perform other operations on the mobile
phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone: e.g. selecting and activating a
software application.
Connecting via the snap-in adapter*
The mobile phone can also be connected using
the snap-in adapter, refer to page 174.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications MINI Connected
184
Using MINI Connected
After successful connection of the mobile phone
to the vehicle and activation of MINI Connected,
the applications are displayed on the Control
Display and can be operated using the MINI joy-
stick.
Volume adjustments can be made using the
buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10,
or using the volume control knob on the radio,
refer to page 130.
1. Press the button.
This opens the main menu.
2. "MINI Connected"
3. Select the desired software application.
The extent of MINI Connected that is shown on
the Control Display depends on the range of
installed software applications on the mobile
phone.
The data transfer of the software applica-
tion from the telephone to the vehicle can
take a few minutes. Some software applications
depend on the speed of the available Internet
connection for the mobile phone.<
Certain versions of mobile phones used and
their software can make it impossible to use
MINI Connected and the Bluetooth hands-free
system at the same time.
After a phone call, it may be necessary to restart
the software application on the mobile phone.
PlugIn*
Selected functions of an Apple device are shown
on the Control Display. They are operated using
the on-board computer.
1. Connecting an Apple device over a USB
audio interface, refer to page 183.
2. "MINI Connected"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Navigating among the functions shown via a
MINI joystick and, e.g., selecting a desired
category or track.
Press the button to switch back or to switch
to a higher level within the functions of an Apple
device.
Press the button twice to switch back to the
main menu.
Additional information can be found in the
MINI Connected operating instructions at
www.mini.com/connectivity.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MINI Connected Communications
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Move Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communications
REFERENCE
MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Refueling
188
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling;
otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler flap
Opening
1. Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message
will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or miss-
ing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
manually release the fuel filler flap:
1. Open cargo area trim panel, arrow 1.
2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump sym-
bol, arrow 2.
The fuel filler flap opens.
Observe the following when refueling
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel; otherwise, there is a danger of
personal injury and property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> premature pump shutoff
> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when you top off twice after
the first time that the fuel pump nozzle clicks off.
Fuel tank capacity
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruis-
ing range falls below 30 miles/50 km, oth-
erwise engine functions are not ensured and
damage can occur.<
Approx. 12.3 US gal/47 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Refueling MOBILITY
189
Fuel specifications
Fuels that are labeled at the pump as containing
metal may not be used.
Do not fill the tank with leaded gasoline or
gasoline that contains metal additives,
such as manganese or iron; otherwise, long term
damage to the catalytic converter or other com-
ponents may result.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing
85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise, the
engine and fuel supply system will be dam-
aged.<
Required fuel
Super premium gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI rating is:
> Cooper S: 89
> Cooper: 87
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
starting at high outside temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differ-
ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an
equivalent amount of cosolvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to defects
in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
190
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Checking pressure
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that can not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and
the risk of an accident. Do not drive with
deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using run-
flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Check the tire inflation pressures only on cold
tires. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/
2 km driving or when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm,
the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the flat tire monitor, page 70,
or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, page 73.<
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The tire inflation pressures apply to the
tire sizes approved and the tire brands
recommended by the manufacturer of your
MINI. Your MINI dealer will be glad to advise
you.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permitted speed for these
tire inflation pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise,
tire damage and accidents may occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
191
Tire inflation pressures for driving above
100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100mph or 160km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the law could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
192
Tire inflation pressures MINI Cooper Countryman
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Speeds up to a
max. of 100 mph /
160 km/h
Speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph /
160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in psi/kilopas-
cal with cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
32/220 32/220 35/240 35/240
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 226.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
193
Tire inflation pressures MINI Cooper S Countryman / Cooper S ALL4 Countryman
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Speeds up to a
max. of 100 mph /
160 km/h
Speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph /
160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the
table are indicated in psi/kilopas-
cal with cold tires. Cold = ambient
temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S
205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
205/55 R 17 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
32/220 32/220 38/260 38/260
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 226.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
194
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, corner-
ing, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteris-
tics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio
in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
225/45 R 17 91 V
For instance:
Manufacturer's
code for tire make
Tire size and
tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
195
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent lev-
els of performance on the laboratory test wheel
that exceed the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC - run-flat tires*
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of
the tire, page 196.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires regularly for tread wear, signs
of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the
tread. Check the tread depth.
Tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
Winter tires
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. If the tire tread has been
driven down to the wear indicators, a tread
depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.
Tire damage
Due to low-profile tires, please note that wheels,
tires and suspensions parts are more susceptible
to road hazards and consequential damages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immediately
and have wheels and tires thoroughly
checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest
MINI dealer or tire shop that works according to
MINI repair procedures with correspondingly
trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle
towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely dan-
gerous for vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
196
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding:
DOT ... 0211 means that the tire was manufac-
tured in week 2 of 2011.
For various reasons, such as the development of
brittleness, the manufacturer of your MINI rec-
ommends tire replacement after no more than
6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the
tires.
Run-flat tires*
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-sup-
porting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement
in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can con-
tinue to be used subject to certain restrictions,
even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 71.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires mounted only
by your MINI dealer or a specialized tire
shop that has specially trained personnel work-
ing in accordance with the specifications of the
MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried out
properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam-
age and related safety hazards. Make sure that
the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your MINI recom-
mends that you avoid using retreaded
tires, as this could impair driving safety. The
causes for this include potentially different tire
casing structures and often wide variations in
tire age, which can result in a limited service
life.<
Correct wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your MINI recom-
mends mounting only wheels and tires
that it has specifically approved for use on your
particular model. Although other wheels and
tires may theoretically have the same dimen-
sions, variations in factors such as manufactur-
ing tolerances can result in contact between tire
and bodywork, ultimately leading to serious
accidents. The manufacturer of your MINI can-
not evaluate non-approved wheels and tires to
determine if they are suited for use, and there-
fore cannot ensure the operating safety of the
vehicle if they are mounted.<
Your MINI dealer will be glad to inform you
about the correct wheel and tire combination for
your vehicle.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over from
summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire
Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a
puncture, refer to page 73. Your MINI dealer will
be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
197
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your MINI
recommends certain tire brands. They are
marked with a clearly visible MINI designation
on the sidewall of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Run-flat tires*
When mounting new tires or changing over from
summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount
run-flat tires for your own safety. Keep in mind
that no space-saver spare tire is available in the
event of a flat. Your MINI dealer will be glad to
advise you.
Special characteristics of winter tires
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends the
use of winter tires on snowy roads or if temper-
atures drop below 457/ +76. Although all-sea-
son M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci-
dents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view. This
label is available at your tire dealer or MINI
dealer.
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Swapping wheels among the axles
Depending on the individual use, front and rear
tires may exhibit different wear and tear.
In order to maintain an even wear and tear, the
wheels may be rotated between the axles. Your
MINI dealer will be glad to advise you.
Always check the inflation pressure after the tire
rotation, if necessary change the pressure.
Snow chains*
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your MINI,
classified as road-safe and recommended. Con-
tact your MINI dealer for more details.
Only attach snow chains in pairs to the front
wheels with the following tires.
> 195/60 R 16 M+S
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph or 50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it can be useful
to briefly deactivate the DSC or activate the DTC,
refer to page 68.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Under the hood
198
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If
you are not familiar with the regulations to be
observed, have the necessary work on your
vehicle carried out only by a MINI dealer or a
workshop that has specially trained personnel
working in accordance with the specifications of
the MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried
out properly, there is a danger of subsequent
damage and related safety hazards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Do not clean the windshield and head-
lamps if the hood is unlocked as this may
damage the headlamp washer system
*.<
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
If you notice any signs while driving your
vehicle that the hood is not completely
closed, stop at once and close it securely.
Make sure that the closing path of the hood is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Under the hood MOBILITY
199
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number*
2 Battery, under the cover 219
3 Engine oil dipstick 199
4 Engine oil filler neck 200
5 Coolant expansion tank 200
6 Engine compartment fuse box 216
7 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlamp
and window washer system 53
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Check the engine oil level regularly, e.g. when
refueling.
Checking engine oil level
1. With the vehicle's engine at normal operat-
ing temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted
driving for at least 6 miles/10 km, park the
vehicle on a level surface.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Pull the dipstick out after approx. 5 minutes
and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth, paper
towel or similar material.
4. Carefully push the dipstick all the way into
the guide tube and pull it out again.
The oil level should be between the two
marks on the dipstick.
The oil quantity corresponding to the difference
between the two marks on the dipstick is
1 US quart/1 liter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Under the hood
200
Do not fill beyond the upper mark on the
dipstick. Excess oil will damage the
engine.<
Adding engine oil
Do not add the maximum quantity of
1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until the oil level
has dropped to just above the lower mark on the
dipstick, page 199.
Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km;
otherwise, the engine could be dam-
aged.<
If too much oil is added, immediately have
the vehicle checked; otherwise, engine
damage may result.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the warnings on
the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may
result.<
Oil types for re-filling
Notes
Do not use oil additives as this could result
in engine damage.<
When choosing oil, ensure that it belongs
to one of the SAE viscosity classes 0W-40,
0W-30, 5W-40 and 5W-30; otherwise, malfunc-
tions and damage to the engine may result.<
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Some types of oil may not be available in every
country.
Approved oil types
Additional information on approved types of oil
can be found at a dealer.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/1 liter of another oil with the fol-
lowing specification may be used:
Oil change
Only dealers are to perform oil changes.
Coolant
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your MINI. Your MINI dealer knows
which additives are suitable and will be glad to
advise you.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may result. Because addi-
tives are harmful to your health, it is important
to follow the instructions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environmen-
tal protection regulations when disposing
of coolant additives.<
Gasoline engines
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Gasoline engines
API SM or higher specifications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Under the hood MOBILITY
201
Coolant temperature
A warning light will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Checking coolant level
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
The coolant level is correct if it is between the
Min and Max markings.
Topping off
1. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
2. Slowly fill to the correct fluid level; do not
overfill.
3. Close by turning the cap.
Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated
as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Maintenance
202
Maintenance
MINI Maintenance System
The MINI Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your MINI. The objective is to optimize efforts
with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance
costs.
If and when you come to sell your MINI, a com-
prehensive record of servicing will prove a signif-
icant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the different
driving conditions of your MINI into account.
Condition Based Service uses this to determine
the current and future service requirements. By
letting you define a service and maintenance
regimen that reflects your own individual
requirements, the system builds the basis for
trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, page 59.
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your MINI dealer can read
out this data from the remote control unit, and
propose an optimized maintenance approach.
Whenever you take your car in for servicing you
should therefore hand your MINI dealer the
remote control unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, page 62; otherwise, the effective-
ness of Condition Based Service CBS is not
assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
The manufacturer of the MINI recom-
mends that you have service and repair
operations performed at your MINI dealer.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries ver-
ify that your vehicle has received the specified
regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Maintenance MOBILITY
203
Socket for On-Board
Diagnosis OBD
The primary components that make up the
emissions can be checked by a device via the
OBD socket.
Emissions
The warning lamps come on. The vehicle
is producing higher emissions. You can
continue your journey, but moderate
your speed and exercise due caution.
Have the car checked as soon as possible.
Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps
will flash or light up continuously. This indicates
excessive misfiring or a malfunction in the
engine. If this happens, reduce your speed and
visit the nearest MINI dealer as soon as possible.
Severe misfiring can quickly lead to serious dam-
age of emissions-related components, espe-
cially the catalytic converter. In addition,
mechanical engine components can become
damaged.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight-
ened, the OBD system may conclude
that fuel vapors are escaping, causing
an indicator to light up. If the filler cap is then
tightened, the indicator should go out within a
few days.
Data memory
Your vehicle displays data about the operation,
malfunctions, and user settings. These data are
stored in the vehicle and can be partly stored in
the remote control; the data can be read by suit-
able devices, in particular at your service center.
The data read out are used for supporting the
service processes and repair or for optimization
and development of vehicle functions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Care
204
Care
Car-care products
Regular cleaning and care helps to maintain the
value of your MINI.
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends
using manufacturer-approved products to clean
and care for your vehicle.
Your MINI dealer would be pleased to advise
you on cleaning and care products and services
for your MINI.
The ingredients of original MINI Care Prod-
ucts have been tested, and the products
have been tested in the laboratory and in prac-
tice. They offer optimum care and protection for
your vehicle.<
Do not use any cleansers containing alco-
hol or solvents as these may cause dam-
age.<
Cleaning agents may contain hazardous
or health-damaging substances. Follow
the warning and hazard instructions on the
packaging. For interior cleaning, always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle.
Do not use any products that are not intended
for cleaning the vehicle.<
External care
Washing your vehicle
Especially during the winter months the
vehicle should be frequently washed. Dirt
and road salt can damage the vehicle.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake rotors can corrode.<
Car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
Do not use automatic high-pressure car
washes; otherwise, water may drip into
the vehicle around the windows.<
Before driving into the car wash, check if the sys-
tem is suitable for your MINI. Observe the fol-
lowing points:
> Vehicle dimensions, page 225
> If necessary: fold in the outside mirrors,
page 41
> Maximum permissible tire width
Avoid car washes with tracks higher than
4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the chassis could
be damaged.<
Preparations for driving into the car wash:
> Unscrew the rod antenna.
> Deactivate the rain sensor
* to prevent unin-
tentional wiping.
> Deactivate rear window wiper and protect it
from damage. Ask the car wash operator
about measures that can be taken to protect
the wipers.
> Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoil-
ers or telephone antennas, if there is a pos-
sibility that they could be damaged.
> Inserting the remote control into the ignition
lock.
Automatic transmission
Before driving into the car wash, make sure that
the vehicle can roll:
1. Place the remote control, even with Comfort
Access, in the ignition lock.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Care MOBILITY
205
5. Insert the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, make sure that you maintain suf-
ficient distance from the vehicle and do not
exceed a maximum temperature of 1407/606.
If the distance is too close, the pressure too high,
or the temperature too high, parts of the vehicle
can be damaged, or water can penetrate.
Observe the operating instructions for high-
pressure washers.<
Do not spray sensors such as Park Dis-
tance Control with high-pressure washers
for a long time and maintain the greatest possi-
ble distance of approx. 1 ft/30 cm from them.<
Manual washing
Use a great deal of water and, if necessary, car
shampoo when washing your car by hand. Clean
the vehicle with a sponge or a washing brush
applying a slight amount of pressure.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or turn off the ignition
to prevent unintentional wiping.<
Observe local regulations regarding wash-
ing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not wipe dry and do not use abrasive or cor-
rosive cleaning agents. Remove dirt and con-
tamination, such as insects, by soaking with
shampoo and then washing with plenty of
water.
Do not remove accumulated ice and snow with
an ice scraper; use window deicers instead.
Windows
Clean the outside and inside of the windows and
mirrors with a window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and change regularly to
prevent the formation of streaks.
Wax, preservatives and dirt on the win-
dows cause streaks when the windshield
wipers are on, and can cause premature wear of
the wiper blades and interfere with the rain sen-
sor.<
Paintwork, care
Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value
and protects the paint from the long-term
effects of aggressive substances.
In some regions, environmental factors can
affect the vehicle paintwork and damage it. It is
therefore important to adjust the frequency and
extent of vehicle care correspondingly.
Immediately remove aggressive materials such
as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or
bird droppings to prevent damage to the paint-
work.
Removing paintwork damage
Depending on the severity of the damage,
immediately repair stone damage or
scratches to prevent rusting.<
The manufacturer of the MINI recommends
repairing paint damage professionally according
to factory specifications with original MINI
paints.
Preservation
Preservation is necessary when water no longer
beads on the clean paint surface. To preserve
the paint, only use preservatives that contain
carnauba or synthetic waxes.
Rubber seals
Only treat with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon sprays or other silicon-
containing care products on rubber seals;
otherwise, noise and damage could occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Care
206
Chrome parts*
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radiator
grill and door handles with copious quantities of
water and, if necessary, a shampoo additive,
especially when contaminated with road salt.
For additional treatment, use chrome polish.
Light alloy wheels*
The system produces brake dust that collects on
the light alloy wheels. Clean them regularly with
acid-free wheel cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acid-containing,
highly alkaline, or abrasive cleansers or
steam jets hotter than 1407/606 as they may
cause damage.<
External sensors
Keep the outside sensors on the vehicle
such as the Park Distance Control clean
and ice-free to ensure that they function prop-
erly.<
internal Care
Upholstery/fabrics
Regularly use a vacuum cleaner to remove sur-
face dirt.
In case of serious spots such as liquid stains, use
a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and
suitable interior cleaners. Observe the instruc-
tions on the packaging.
Clean upholstery up to the seams. Do not
rub forcefully.<
Velcro fasteners on pants or other items of
clothing can damage seat covers. Make
sure that all Velcro fasteners are closed.<
Leather/leather coverings*
The leather processed by the manufac-
turer of your MINI is a high-quality natural
product. Light variations in the grain is one of
the typical properties of natural leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Use a cloth or
vacuum cleaner to remove dust on a regular
basis.
Especially when the leather has a light color, it
should be cleaned regularly since it tends to get
heavily soiled.
Treat the leather twice a year using a leather
lotion since dirt and grease will gradually attack
the leather's protective layer.
Carpets/floor mats*
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an exist-
ing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened again after they have been removed, e.g.
for cleaning.<
Floor mats can be removed to be cleaned.
If the carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfi-
ber cloth and water or an interior cleaner. When
doing so, rub forward and back in the driving
direction; otherwise, the carpet may become
matted.
Interior plastic parts
These include:
> Plastic surfaces
> Lamp glass
> Display panes
> Mat parts
Only clean with water and, if necessary, solvent-
free plastic cleaners.
Do not use solvents such as alcohol, lac-
quer thinner, cold cleaners, fuel, or similar,
as these will damage the surfaces.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Care MOBILITY
207
Decorative strips*
Only clean decorative strips with moist cloths.
Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Displays
To clean displays such as radios or display ele-
ments, use a display cleaning cloth or a soft,
non-scratching, lint-free cloth.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning
the display as this can cause damage.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep fluids of any
kind away from the device. Surfaces or electrical
components may otherwise become corroded
or damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use cleaning CDs as this could
damage parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If you are not going to drive your car for more
than three months, please ask for advice from
your MINI dealer or a workshop that works
according to MINI manufacturer specifications.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
208
Replacing components
Wiper blades
Changing the front wiper blades
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1,
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Pull the wiper blade forward and out of the
catch mechanism.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixture
until it engages audibly.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Changing the rear wiper blade
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Rotate the wiper blade toward the back as
far as it will go, arrow.
3. Press the wiper blade against the limit and
thus out of the mounting.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixture
until it engages audibly.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be
handled carefully. The manufacturer of your
MINI recommends having your MINI dealer per-
form any work that you do not feel competent to
perform yourself or that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your MINI dealer.
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question; otherwise, short circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
Caring for headlamps, refer to page 205.
For any bulb replacement not described
below, contact a MINI dealer or a work-
shop that has specially trained personnel work-
ing in accordance with the specifications of the
MINI manufacturer.<
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your MINI dealer.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light sources for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes are related to conven-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
209
tional laser diodes, and legislation defines them
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours; otherwise, this could cause
irritation of the retina.<
Headlamp glass lens
In cool or humid weather, condensation may
occur on the interior of outside lights. The con-
densation disappears a short time after the light
is switched on. The headlamps do not need to
be changed. If a lot of moisture is present, e.g.
water droplets in the light, have them checked
by your service center.
Xenon lamps*
The service life of these bulbs is very long and
the probability of failure very low, provided that
they are not switched on and off an excessive
number of times. If a xenon lamp fails neverthe-
less, switch on the fog lamps and continue the
journey with great care, provided that local leg-
islation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacement, carried out
only by a MINI dealer or a workshop that has
specially trained personnel working in accor-
dance with the specifications of the MINI manu-
facturer. Due to high voltage, there is a risk of
fatal injury if work on the xenon lamps is carried
out improperly.<
Halogen low beams and high beams
H13 bulb, 60/55 watts
The H13 bulb is pressurized. Therefore,
wear safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise, there is a risk of injury if the bulb is
damaged.<
Be careful when installing the cover; oth-
erwise, leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Accessing the lamp from the engine
compartment
The low-beam/high-beam bulb can be changed
from the engine compartment.
Removing the cover:
1. Press the tab.
2. Flip open the cover and take it out of the
holder.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat-
tach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover; oth-
erwise, leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Replacing the bulb
1. Turn the lamp counterclockwise, arrow 1,
and remove it, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
210
2. Push on the catch, arrow 1, and disconnect
the connector, arrow 2.
3. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Turn signals, parking lamps, roadside
parking lamps, and fog lamps
Accessing the lamps via the wheel well
1 Turn signal
2 Parking/roadside parking/fog lamps
Replacing a turn signal bulb
21 watt bulb, P21W, if necessary PY 21 W
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 1.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Remove the inside cover.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
4. Unscrew the bulb counterclockwise.
5. To insert the new bulb and replace the cov-
ers, proceed in reverse order.
Replacing a parking/roadside parking
lamp bulb
5 watt bulb, W 5 W
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Unscrew the upper bulb counterclockwise.
4. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
211
Replacing a fog lamp bulb
H8 bulb, 35 watts
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Pull the cable connector.
4. Unscrew the lower bulb counterclockwise.
5. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Side turn signals
5watt bulb, W5W
1. Open hood.
2. Squeeze clamping clip, arrows, and remove
bulb holder.
3. Unscrew bulb counterclockwise and
replace.
4. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Side marker lamps
Have these bulbs replaced by your MINI dealer.
Tail lamps
Bulb P 21 W
1 Brake/tail lamp
2 Turn signal
3 Brake/tail lamp
4 Backup lamps
5 Backup lamps
Changing
All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.
1. Switch off the light and remove the infrared
remote control from the ignition lock.
2. Push the cover panel out from the rear of the
cargo area side trim panel and remove it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
212
3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing down
on the clamping clip, arrow.
4. Remove bulb holder.
5. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn-
ing it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
7. Replace the cover panel.
License plate lamps
5 watt bulb, C 5 W
1. Using a screwdriver, push the lamp to the
left in the tab of the lamp housing, arrow 1.
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Insert the lamp.
Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In
the event of a malfunction, contact your MINI
dealer or a workshop that has specially trained
personnel working in accordance with the spec-
ifications of your MINI manufacturer.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures in the event of a break-
down:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving
traffic and switch on the hazard warning flash-
ers.
Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock. Engage the parking
brake and shift into 1st or reverse gear or place
the selector lever in position P.
All passengers should be outside the vehicle and
in a safe place, e.g. behind a guardrail.
Erect a warning triangle or warning flasher at the
appropriate distance if necessary. Comply with
all safety guidelines and regulations.<
In the event of a flat tire, different procedures
should be followed depending on the equip-
ment included in your vehicle:
> MINI Mobility System, refer to the following
section
> Run-flat tires, page 196
MINI Mobility System*
The Mobility System is located under the left
front seat.
Preparations
Use of the MINI Mobility System may be ineffec-
tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 in/
4 mm or more. Contact the nearest MINI dealer
if the tire cannot be made drivable with the
Mobility System.
Do not remove foreign bodies which have pen-
etrated the tire if possible.
Follow the instructions on using the Mobil-
ity System found on the compressor and
the sealant bottle.<
Remove the adhesive label for the speed limit
from the sealant bottle and affix it to the steer-
ing wheel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
213
Sealant and compressor
1 Sealant bottle and adhesive label with speed
limit
2 Filling hose
Note the use-by date on the sealant bot-
tle.<
3 Holder for the sealant bottle
4 Compressor
5 Plug and cable for the socket in the vehicle
interior, page 92
6 Connection hose to connect the compressor
and sealant bottle or the compressor and
wheel
7 On/off switch
8 Pressure gauge for indicating the tire infla-
tion pressure
9 Release button for reducing the tire inflation
pressure
Connector, cable and connection hose are
stored in the compressor housing.
Using the Mobility System
To repair a tire puncture with the Mobility Sys-
tem, proceed as follows:
> Filling the tire with sealant
> Distributing the sealant
> Correct the tire inflation pressure
Filling the tire with sealant
Proceed in the specified order; otherwise,
sealant may emerge under high pres-
sure.<
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
2. Pull the connecting hose 6 completely out of
the compressor housing and screw it onto
the connector of the sealant bottle. Make
sure that the hose is not kinked.
3. Insert the sealant bottle on the compressor
housing in an upright position.
4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the
defective wheel and screw the filling hose 2
of the sealant bottle onto the valve.
5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off.
6. Insert the plug 5 into the lighter socket/
power socket in the vehicle interior,
page 92.
7. With the engine running:
Switch on the compressor and let it run for
approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill the tire with
sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure
of approx. 26 psi/180 kPa.
When filling with the sealant, the infla-
tion pressure can briefly rise to
approx. 73 psi/500 kPa. Do not switch off
the compressor during this phase.<
Do not run the compressor for longer
than 10 minutes; otherwise, the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
214
device will overheat and possibly be dam-
aged.<
8. Switch off the compressor.
If an air pressure of 26 psi/180 kPa is not
reached:
1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel
and drive the vehicle forward and backward
approx. 33 ft/10 m to distribute the liquid
sealant in the tire evenly.
2. Inflate the tire again with the compressor.
If an inflation pressure of 26 psi/180 kPa
still cannot be reached, the tire is too
heavily damaged. Please contact the nearest
MINI dealer.<
Stowing Mobility System
1. Unscrew filler hose 2 of the sealant bottle
from the wheel.
2. Unscrew connecting hose of the
compressor 6 from the sealant bottle.
3. Connect the filler hose 2 of the sealant bot-
tle to the unoccupied connection on the
sealant bottle.
This prevents the rest of the sealant from
escaping from the bottle.
4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitable
material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
5. Stow Mobility System back in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 3 miles/5 km so that
the sealant evenly distributes itself.
Do not exceed speeds of 50 mph/
80 km/h.
If possible, do not drop below 10 mph/
20 km/h.<
Correct the tire inflation pressure
1. After driving approx. 3 miles/5 km or ten
minutes, stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve.
3. Insert the plug 5 into the power socket in
the vehicle interior.
4. Correct inflation pressure to 26 psi/180 kPa.
With the engine running:
> To increase the inflation pressure: switch on
the compressor. To check the current infla-
tion pressure, switch off the compressor.
Do not run the compressor for longer
than 10 minutes; otherwise, the
device will overheat and possibly be dam-
aged.<
> To decrease the inflation pressure: press the
release button 9.
If the tire cannot maintain the inflation
pressure, drive the vehicle again, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps
1to4.
If an inflation pressure of 26 psi/180 kPa still
cannot be reached, the tire is too heavily dam-
aged. Contact the nearest MINI dealer.<
Driving on
Do not exceed the permitted maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; doing so may
result in an accident.<
Replace the defective tire as soon as possible
and have the new wheel/tire assembly bal-
anced.
Have the Mobility System refilled.
Changing wheels
The pouch with the wheel changing kit* is
stored under the flat load floor
*. It includes:
> Vehicle jack
> Reversible ratchet
> Wheel stud wrench
> Extractor hook for wheel center cover
> Chock
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
215
Preparing for a wheel change
Observe the safety precautions regarding
flat tires on page 212.<
Additional safety measures when chang-
ing tires:
Only change the tire when parked on a surface
that is level, firm and not slippery.
The vehicle or the jack could slip sideways on
soft or slippery support surfaces, such as snow,
ice, flagstones, etc.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
Do not lie under the vehicle or start the engine
when the vehicle is supported by the jack; other-
wise, there is a risk of fatal injury.<
1. Place the foldable chock
* behind the front
wheel on the other side of the vehicle or in
front of the wheel if the vehicle is on an
incline. If the wheel is changed on a surface
with a more severe slope, take additional
precautions to secure the vehicle from roll-
ing.
2. Uncover the lug bolts if necessary.
3. Loosen the lug bolts by a half turn.
Jacking up the vehicle
The vehicle jack is designed for changing
wheels only. Do not attempt to raise
another vehicle model with it or to raise any load
of any kind. To do so could cause accidents and
personal injury.<
1. Place the jack at the jacking point closest to
the wheel.
The jack base must be perpendicular to the
surface beneath the jacking point.
2. Slide reversible ratchet onto the fixture on
the jack, arrow 1.
3. As you ratchet up the jack, place the jack
head onto the lifting point on the body,
arrow 2.
4. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised off the ground.
Mounting the wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Clean the lug bolts.
3. Lift the new wheel into place.
4. Screw at least two lug bolts finger-tight into
opposite bolt holes.
5. Screw in the remaining bolts.
6. Tighten all the lug bolts firmly in a diagonal
pattern.
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Remove the jack.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Replacing components
216
Tightening the lug bolts
Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
Immediately have the wheels checked
with a calibrated torque wrench to ensure
that the lug bolts are firmly seated. Otherwise,
incorrectly tightened lug bolts can present a
safety hazard.<
Tightening torque: 103.3 lb ft or 140 Nm.
Replace the defective tire as soon as possible
and have the new wheel/tire assembly bal-
anced.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate.
Battery replacement
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manu-
facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be dam-
aged and systems or functions may not be fully
available.<
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your dealer to
ensure that all comfort functions are fully avail-
able.
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the
engine is off. Connections, refer to Jump-start-
ing on page 218.
Disposal
After replacing old batteries, return the
used batteries to your MINI dealer or to a
recycling center. Maintain the battery in an
upright position for transport and storage.
Always secure the battery against tipping over
during transport.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
may not be fully functional and may require ini-
tialization. Individual settings are also lost and
must be reprogrammed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, page 61.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, page 132.
> Navigation system
Operability must be waited for, page 108.
> Glass sunroof
*, electric
It may only be possible to tilt the sunroof, if
applicable. The system must be initialized.
Contact your nearest MINI dealer.
Fuses
Do not attempt to repair a blown fuse or
replace it with a fuse of a different color or
Ampere rating. To do this could cause a fire in
the vehicle resulting from a circuit overload.
Have the fuse changed only by a MINI dealer or
a workshop that has specially trained personnel
working in accordance with the specifications of
the MINI manufacturer.<
A fuse allocation diagram is located on the inside
of the fuse box cover panels.
In the engine compartment
Opening the cover
Press the latch.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Replacing components MOBILITY
217
In the vehicle interior
On the right side of the footwell.
Opening the cover
Press out at the recess.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Giving and receiving assistance
218
Giving and receiving assistance
Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance is available by phone
24 hours a day in many countries. You can
obtain assistance there in the event of a vehicle
breakdown.
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents regu-
larly and replace any items in good time, if nec-
essary.
The first aid pouch is located on the rear cargo
well by the left side trim panel or under the pull-
out floor panel.
Warning triangle*
In the cargo area under the loading sill.
To remove, open the two clasps.
Jump-starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your MINI's engine
can be started by connecting two jumper cables
to another vehicle's battery. You can also use
the same method to help start another vehicle.
Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated
clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible per-
sonal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi-
cle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi-
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the support vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of shorting.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY
219
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could cause
injury occur.<
1. Open the battery cover in the engine com-
partment to access the positive terminal of
your MINI.
2. Release the tabs on the left and right sides of
the positive terminal cover
*, arrows 1, and
lift the cover to open, arrow 2.
3. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or to a starting-aid terminal of the
vehicle providing assistance.
4. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
5. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Body ground in MINI:
6. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the other vehicle in the
usual manner.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting, towing
away
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
MOBILITY Giving and receiving assistance
220
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or at
the right rear.
The tow fitting can be found under the right
front seat or in the pocket of the tire changing
set
* in the cargo area.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the tow
fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Press the lower part of the cover. This will push
out the upper edge of the cover, which can then
be removed.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 46; otherwise, the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield
wipers may be unavailable. Do not tow the vehi-
cle with just the rear axle raised, as this would
allow the steering to turn.<
There is no power assist while the engine is off.
Thus, braking and steering will require increased
effort.
Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend-
ing on local regulations.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Tow vehicles with automatic transmission
only with a tow truck or with the front
wheels lifted; otherwise, the transmission can be
damaged.<
Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
With towbar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same side
on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to
avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please
observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY
221
With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With tow truck: vehicles without ALL4
all-wheel drive
Have the MINI Countryman transported by a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
With tow truck: vehicles with ALL4 all-
wheel drive
Do not have your vehicle with ALL4 all-
wheel drive towed with the front or rear
axle raised individually; otherwise, the wheels
may lock and the transfer case may be dam-
aged.<
Only have your MINI Countryman transported
on a flat bed.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-
ble; instead, jump-start the engine, page 218.
Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only
be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles
with an automatic transmission cannot be tow-
started at all.
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, page 46.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
completely depressed and then slowly
release the clutch. After the engine starts,
immediately depress the clutch completely
again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Find Me.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communications
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Technical data
224
Technical data
Engine data
Cooper Cooper S
Displacement cu in/cmμ 97.5/1,598 97.5/1,598
Number of cylinders 4 4
Maximum power out-
put
hp 121 181
At engine speed rpm 6,000 5,500
Maximum torque
with overboost
lb ft/Nm 114/155
–
177/240
192/260
At engine speed
with overboost
rpm 4,250
–
1,600-5,000
1,700-4,500
Overboost briefly raises the maximum torque at high rates of acceleration, e.g. when passing.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technical data REFERENCE
225
Dimensions
All dimensions in inches/mm. Minimum turning radius dia.: 38.1 ft/11.6 m.
Information after the semicolon: different values for MINI Cooper S.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Technical data
226
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4
Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras
> Manual transmission lbs./kg 2,954/1,340 3,053/1,385 3,208/1,455
> Automatic transmis-
sion
lbs./kg
3,020/1,370 3,097/1,405 3,252/1,475
Approved gross weight
> Manual transmission lbs./kg 3,858/1,750 3,990/1,810 4,101/1,860
> Automatic transmis-
sion
lbs./kg
3,924/1,780 4,034/1,830 4,145/1,880
Approved front axle load
> Manual transmission lbs./kg 2,028/920 2,105/955 2,161/980
> Automatic transmis-
sion
lbs./kg
2,094/950 2,150/975 2,205/1,000
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 1,918/870 1,918/870 2,017/915
Approved roof load capac-
ity
lbs./kg
165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
12.4 - 41.3/
350 - 1,170
12.4 - 41.3/
350 - 1,170
12.4 - 41.3/
350 - 1,170
US gal/US quarts Liters Notes
Fuel tank 12.4/– approx. 47 Fuel grade: page 189
Including reserve of 2.1/– approx. 8
Window washer system incl.
headlamp washer system –/4.2 approx. 4 For more details: page 53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
227
Short commands for the voice
activation system
General information
Instructions for the voice activation system, refer
to page 21.
Having the possible spoken commands read
aloud: {Voice commands}
The following short commands apply to vehicles
with voice activation systems. They do not work
for equipment with which only the mobile
phone can be operated by voice.
Useful short commands
*
Function Command
Accessing tone control {Tone}
Accessing settings {Settings}
Accessing the computer {Onboard info}
Accessing contacts
* {Contacts}
Displaying the phone book
* {Phonebook}
Accessing services
* {Assist}
Selecting destination entry
* {Enter address}
Accessing route guidance
* {Guidance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system
228
CD/Multimedia
CD drive
External devices
Tone control
Function Command
Playing a CD {C D on}
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D … track …} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track {C D track …} e.g. track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD {C D}
Function Command
Selecting external devices {External devices}
Function Command
Accessing tone control {Tone}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
229
Radio
FM
AM
Satellite radio
Function Command
Selecting the radio {Radio}
Selecting FM stations {F M}
Selecting manual search {Manual}
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
Selecting a station {Select station} e.g. W-PLJ
Function Command
Selecting AM stations {A M}
Selecting manual search {Manual}
Function Command
Selecting the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system
230
Stored stations
Telephone
Office*
Function Command
Selecting stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset …} e.g. stored station 2
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
To display phone book {Phonebook}
To redial {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}
Function Command
Calling up the Office menu {Office}
Displaying Current office {Current office}
Displaying contacts {Contacts}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
231
Contacts*
Navigation
General information
Displaying messages {Messages}
Displaying calendar {Calendar}
Displaying tasks {Tasks}
Displaying reminders {Reminders}
Function Command
Function Command
Accessing contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Selecting destination entry {Enter address}
Entering an address {Enter address}
Selecting route guidance {Guidance}
Starting route guidance {Start guidance}
Ending route guidance {Stop guidance}
Retrieving home address {Home address}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system
232
Map
Selecting route criteria {Route preference}
Selecting route {Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book {Address book}
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Accessing traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Function Command
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Map perspective view}
Automatic scaling of the map
* {Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
233
Route guidance with intermediate destinations
Vehicle information
Settings
Vehicle
Function Command
Entering a new destination {Enter address}
Function Command
Accessing the computer {Onboard info}
Accessing the trip computer {Trip computer}
Accessing vehicle information {Vehicle info}
Accessing vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Accessing settings {Settings}
Accessing options {Options}
Settings on the Control Display {Control display}
Accessing time and date settings {Time and date}
Accessing language and unit settings {Language and units}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system
234
Equipment*
Accessing speed limit settings {Speed}
Activating lighting {Lighting}
Selecting the door lock {Door locks}
Function Command
Function Command
Selecting the air conditioning {Climate}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
236
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
INDEX
A
ABS Antilock Brake System 67
Accessories, refer to Your
individual vehicle 4
Acknowledgment signals for
locking/unlocking vehicle 28
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate control 87
Adaptive Light Control 80
Additives
– coolant 200
– engine oil 200
Address, entering 115
Address for navigation
– entering 109, 115
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Air
conditioner 84
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 85
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 131
Air conditioner 83
Air conditioning mode
– air conditioner 84
– automatic climate control 85
– ventilation 87
Air distribution
– automatic 86
– individual 85
– manual 85
Air flow rate 84, 86
– air conditioning system 84
– automatic climate control 86
– heating, ventilation 84
Air outlets, refer to Air vents 83
Air pressure, checking, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 190
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air
mode 84, 86
Air supply
– air conditioner 84
– automatic climate control 85
– ventilation 87
Air vents 83
Airbags 76
– sitting safely 37
– warning lamp 78
Airing, refer to Ventilation 87
AKI, refer to Fuel grade 189
Alarm system 31
ALL4 all-wheel drive system 69
All-season tires, refer to Winter
tires 197
All-wheel drive, refer to
ALL4 69
AM, wa
veband 132
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated-air
mode 84, 86
Ambient lighting 82
Antenna, care 204
Antifreeze
– coolant 200
– washer fluid 53
Antilock Brake System ABS 67
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 31
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 226
Approved engine oils 200
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 226
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 91
Arrival time
– computer 57
– route guidance 118
Ashtray 92
Assistant systems, refer to
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 67
Audio 130
– controls 130
– switching on/off 130
– tone control 131
– volume 130
Audio device, external 90
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 86
Automatic
– air distribution 86
– air flow rate 86
– cruise control 53
– headlamp control 79
Automatic climate control 83
– automatic air distribution 86
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 48
– interlock 48
– overriding selector lever
lock 50
– shiftlock 48
– sport program 49
Auxiliary phone 164
AUX-IN connection 142
AUX-IN, refer to External audio
device 90
Average fuel consumption 56
– setting the units 58
Average speed 56
Avoiding highways for
navigation 118
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 22
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
237
B
Background lighting, refer to
Ambient lighting 82
Backrests, refer to Seats 38
Backup lamps
– replacing bulb 211
Band-aids, refer to First aid
pouch 218
Bar, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 220
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 174
Bass sounds, refer to Tone
control 131
Battery 216
– charging 216
– disposal 34, 216
– jump-starting 218
– temporary power failure 216
Battery renewal
– remote control 34
Being towed 220
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 40
Belts, refer to Safety belts 40
Beverage holders, refer to
Cupholders 92
Black ice, refer to External
temperature warning 56
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 84, 86
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 154, 164
Bluetooth audio 146
– device pairing 146
– disconnecting an audio
connection 148
– playback 147
– unpairing device 148
– What to do if... 148
Bottle holders, refer to
Cupholders 92
Brake Assist 67
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 59
Brake lamps
– replacing bulbs 211
Brake pads, breaking in 96
Brake rotors 97
– brakes 96
– breaking in 96
Brake system 96
– breaking in 96
– disc brakes 97
– MINI Maintenance
System 202
Brakes
– ABS 67
– b
reaking in 96
– MINI Maintenance
System 202
– parking brake 47
– service requirements 59
Brakes, refer to Braking
safely 97
Breakdown service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 218
Break-in period 96
Breaking in the clutch 96
Brightness of Control
Display 65
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 208
Button for starting the
engine 46
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
Calendar 179
– displaying appointment 180
– selecting calendar day 180
California Proposition 65
warning 5
Call
– accepting 157, 168
– ending 157, 168
– muting the
microphone 158, 170
– rejecting 157, 168
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 157, 169
Can holders, refer to
Cupholders 92
Capacities 226
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 216
Car care 204
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
controls 26
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 91
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 154, 163
Car radio, refer to Radio 132
Car wash
– before driving in 47
Car wash, care 204
Car washes 204
Care 204
– car washes 204
– car-care products 204
– CD/DVD drives 207
– external 204
– high-pressure washers 205
– internal 206
– leather 206
– manual washing 205
– upholstery and fabrics 206
– windows 205
– wiper blades 205
Cargo area 98
– capacity 226
– Comfort Access 33
– lamp 82
– opening from outside 30
– trunk lid, refer to Liftgate 30
Cargo area, expanding 98
Cargo area lamp
82
Cargo area li
d, refer to
Liftgate 30
Cargo area partition net, refer
to Cargo net 100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
238
Cargo loading 101
– securing cargo 102
– stowing cargo 102
– vehicle 98
Cargo net 100
Cargo, securing 102
Carpets, care 206
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 96
CD, audio playback 140
CD player 140
– controls 130
– fast forward/reverse 141
– random order 141
– selecting a track 140
– switching on/off 130
– tone control 131
– volume 130
Center armrest 91
Center brake lamp 212
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
Center Rail 91
Center Rail, refer to Storage
compartments 91
Central locking system 27
– Comfort Access 32
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– setting unlocking
behavior 27
Changing bulbs 208
Changing the language on the
Control Display 65
Changing the measurement
units on the Control
Display 58
Changing wheels 214
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 199
Check Control 62
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 44
Child restraint systems 43
Child seats 43
Child-safety locks 45
Chrome parts, care 206
Chrome parts, refer to
Care 204
Cigarette lighter 92
Cleaning headlamps 52
– washer fluid 53
Clock
– 12 h/24 h mode 61
– setting time 61
Closing
– f
rom inside 30
– from outside 27
Clothes hooks 92
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 46
Comfort Access 32
– replacing the battery 34
– what to observe before
entering a car wash 34
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 46
Computer 56
– displays on Control
Display 57
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 98
Condition Based Service
CBS 202
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting electrical
appliances 92
Consumption, refer to Average
fuel consumption 56
Contacts 161, 176
– deleting 162, 179
– displaying 162
– editing 162
– exporting/importing 179
– new contact 178
Control Display
– adjusting brightness 65
Control Display, refer to iDrive
– switching on/off 19
Control Display, refer to On-
board computer
– adjusting brightness 65
Control Display, refer to
On-board computer 16
Control stick, refer to On-board
computer 16
Control unit, refer to On-board
computer 16
Controls and displays 10
Convenient access, refer to
Comfort Access 32
Convenient operation
– windows 28
Convenient start, refer to
Starting the engine 46
Coolant 200
– checking level 201
– filling 201
– temperature 201
Coolant temperature
201
Coo
ling fluid, refer to
Coolant 200
Cooling, maximum 86
Copyright 2
Cornering light, refer to
Adaptive Light Control 80
Criteria for route 118
Cruise control
– indicator lamp 13
Cruising range 56
Cupholders 92
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 226
Current fuel consumption 56
Current playback
– external devices 145
D
Dashboard instruments, refer
to Displays 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 81
Dashboard, refer to Cockpit 10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
239
Data 224
– capacities 226
– dimensions 225
– engine 224
– weights 226
Data memory 203
Date
– setting 62
– setting format 62
Daytime running lights 80
DBC Dynamic Brake Control,
refer to Brake Assist 67
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 76
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 28
Defect
– door lock 29
– fuel filler flap 188
Defining a home address 178
Defogging windows 85, 87
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 85, 87
Defrosting windows 85, 87
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation
– air conditioner 85
– automatic climate control 87
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 85, 87
Destination address
– entering 109, 115
Destination for navigation
– entering 109
– entering via map 114
Differential, breaking in 96
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio 133
Dimensions 225
Dipstick, engine oil 199
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 122
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 122
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 50
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 111
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 224
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 81
Display, refer to On-board
computer controls 16
Displaying contact
pictures 17
8
Displaying special
destinations 114
Displays 12
– instrument cluster 12
– on the Control Display 16
Displays and controls 10
Displays, care 207
Disposal
– of coolant 200
– remote control battery 34
– vehicle battery 216
Distance, refer to Computer 57
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 59
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 57
Distance warning, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 66
Door key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Door lock 29
Door lock, confirmation
signals 28
Doors, manual operation 29
DOT Quality Grades 194
Drinks holders, refer to
Cupholders 92
Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill
Assist 69
Driving dynamics control, refer
to Sport button 69
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 79
Driving notes 96
Driving off on inclines, refer to
Hill Assist 69
Driving stability control
systems 67
Driving through water 97
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 96
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 87
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 67
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 68
Dynamic Brake Control DBC,
refer to Brake Assist 67
Dynamic route guidance 125
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 67
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 68
E
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 130
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 29
– fuel filler flap 188
Electronic brake-force
distribution 67
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 67
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 29
– fuel filler flap 188
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 50
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
240
Engine
– breaking in 96
– data 224
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 201
– speed 224
– starting 46
– starting, Comfort Access 32
– switching off 47
Engine compartment 199
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 200
Engine malfunction
– indicator lamp 13
Engine oil
– adding 200
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 200
– alternative oil types 200
– approved engine oils 200
– capacity 200
– checking level 199
– dipstick 199
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 59
– MINI Maintenance
System 202
Engine oil level, checking 199
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 224
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 46
Entering destination 109
Entering intersection 110
Entertainment sound output
on/off 130
Entry map for destination 114
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 67
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 96
Exterior mirrors 41
– adjusting 41
– automatic dimming
feature 42
– automatic heating 41
– folding in and out 41
External audio device 90
External audio device, refer to
AUX-IN connection 142
External devices
– random play sequence 145
– software update 149
External temperature display
– change units of measure 58
– in the on-board computer 58
External temperature
warning 56
Eyes
– f
or tow-starting and towing
away 220
– for tying down loads 102
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 62
Failure of an electrical
consumer 216
Fast forward
– CD player 141
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 40
Fastest route for
navigation 118
Fault messages, refer to Check
Control 62
Faulty
– tire 71
Filter
– microfilter for air
conditioner 85
– microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 87
Fine wood, care 207
First aid pouch 218
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 46
Flash when locking/
unlocking 28
Flat load floor 100
Flat tire
– run-flat tires 196
– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 72
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 69
– indicating a flat tire 71
– initializing the system 70
– snow chains 70
– system limits 70
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 195
Floor mats, care 206
Floor plate, refer to Flat load
floor 100
FM, waveband 132
Fog lamps
– replacing bulb 210
Folding rear seat backrest 98
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 97
Footwell lamps 82
For your own safety 5
Four-wheel drive, refer to
ALL4 69
Front airbags 76
Front fog lamps 81
– replacing bulb 210
Front seat adjustment 38
Frost on windows, refer to
Defrosting windows 85, 87
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 69
Fuel 189
– gauge 55
– high-quality brands
189
–
quality 189
– specifications 189
– tank capacity 226
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 55
Fuel consumption display
– average fuel consumption 56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
241
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 55
Fuel filler flap 188
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 188
Fuses 216
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 88
Gasoline
– refer to Average fuel
consumption 56
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 55
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 189
Gear indicator
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 48
Gear shifting
– automatic transmission 48
– manual transmission 48
Gearshift lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 48
– manual transmission 48
General driving notes 96
Glass roof, electric 34
– convenient operation 28, 29
– opening, closing 35
– remote control 28
– tilting 34
Glove compartment 90
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 108
Grills, refer to Air vents 83
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 226
H
Halogen lamps
– replacing bulb 209
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 47
Hands-free device
Bluetooth 154
Hands-free
system 14, 160, 172
Hazard warning flashers 14
HD Radio 133
Head airbags 76
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 80
Head restraints 39
– sitting safely 37
Headlamp control,
automatic 79
Headlamp flasher 50
– indicator lamp 11, 13
Headlamp glass lens 209
Headlamps
– replacing bulb 209
Headlamps, care 205
Heated
– mirrors 41
– rear window 84, 86
– seats 40
Heating 83
– mirrors 41
– rear window 84, 86
– seats 40
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 102
Height adjustment
– seats 38
– steering wheel 42
Height, refer to
Dimensions 225
High beams 81
– headlamp flasher 81
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulb 209
High water, refer to Driving
through water 97
Highway, refer to Route
criteria 118
Hill Assist 69
Hills 97
Holders for cups 92
Homepage 4
Hood 198
Horn 10
Hot exhaust system 96
Hy
droplaning 97
I
IBOC, refer to HD Radio 133
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 56
Ignition 46
– switched off 46
– switched on 46
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 46
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 46
Ignition key, refer to
Integrated key/remote
control 26
Ignition lock 46
Imprint 2
Incoming call 157, 168
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 73
Indicator lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 81
Individual air distribution 85
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 72
Information
– on another location 112
– on current position 112
– on destination location 112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
242
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 70
– glass roof, electric 35
– radio, refer to Station,
storing 133
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 122
Instrument cluster, refer to
Displays 12
Instrument lighting 81
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Instrument panel, refer to
Displays 12
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remote
control 88
Interactive map 114
Interesting destination for
navigation 112
Interior lamps 82
– remote control 28
Interior rearview mirror 41
– automatic dimming
feature 42
Interlock 48
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 51
Internet page 4
J
Jacking points 215
Jets, refer to Window washer
nozzles 52
Joystick, refer to On-board
computer 16
Jumpering, refer to
Jump-starting 218
Jump-starting 218
K
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Key, refer to Keys/remote
controls 26
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 32
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
Access 32
Keypad dialing 159, 170
Kickdown 49
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 49
Knock control 189
L
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 208
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
Low beams 79
Lashing eyes, refer to Securing
cargo 102
Last destinations 112
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 44
Leather care 206
LEDs light-emitting diodes 208
Length, refer to
Dimensions 225
License plate lamp
– bulb replacement 212
Liftgate 30
– Comfort Access 33
– opening from outside 30
– opening/closing 30
– unlocking with remote
control 28
Light
– automatic headlamp
control 79
Light alloy wheels, care 206
Light switch 79
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 208
Lighter 92
– socket 92
Lighting
– lamps and bulbs 208
– of the instruments 81
– of vehicle, refer to Lamps 79
Limit, refer to Speed limit 64
Load 101
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 102
Lock buttons of doors, refer to
Locking 30
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 28
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 32
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 28
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Longlife oils
– approved motor oils 200
Low beams 79
– automatic 79
– replacing bulb 209
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 38
Luggage compartment
– doors, refer to Liftgate 30
Luggage compartment
partition net, refer to Cargo
net 100
L
uggage rack, refer to
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 103
Lumbar support 38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
243
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 197
Main menu 17
Maintenance, refer to Service
and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Maintenance system 202
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 62
Manual air distribution 85
Manual mode
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 49
Manual operation
– door lock 29
– fuel filler flap 188
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 50
Manual transmission 48
Manual washing 205
Map
– changing scale 121
Map for navigation
– entering destination 114
Master key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Maximum cooling 86
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 197
Medical assistance, refer to
First aid pouch 218
MENU button 16
Menus, refer to On-board
computer 16
Messages 179
Microfilter
– for air conditioner 85
– for automatic climate
control 87
– MINI Maintenance
System 202
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– MINI Maintenance
System 202
Microphone for telephone 14
MINI Connected 183
MINI Internet page 4
MINI joystick, refer to
On-board computer 16
MINI Maintenance System 202
Mirror dimming feature 42
Mirrors 41
– exterior mirrors 41
– heating 41
– interior rearview mirror 41
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 157, 168
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 154, 163
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 91
– pairing 154, 16
3
– What to do if…. 156, 167
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 91
Mobile phone preparation
Bluetooth 163
Mobility System 212
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to MINI controls
with navigation 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 69
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 50
– refer to Wiper system 51
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
N
Navigation
– storing current position 111
Navigation data 108
Navigation destination
– entering manually 109, 115
– home address 112
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 122
Navigation system 108
– address book 111
– bypassing a route
section 120
– continuing route
guidance 118
– destination entry 109
– dynamic route guidance 125
– entering a destination
manually 109, 115
– opening 108
– planning a trip 116
– route list 119
– selecting destination via
map 114
– selecting route criteria 118
– special destinations 112
– starting route guidance 118
– terminating route
guidance 118
– voice instructions 122
– volume adjustment 122
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 39
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 91
New tires 196
North-facing map 120
Notes 181
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 224
Number of safety belts 37
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
244
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket for
On-Board Diagnosis 203
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 189
Odometer 55
Office 176
– current office 176
– What to do if…. 182
Oil consumption 199
Oil level 199
Oil, refer to Engine oil 199
Oil types 200
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 216
On-board computer 16
– changing language 65
– menu guidance 17
– operating principles 16
– overview 16
– status information 19
Opening and closing
– Comfort Access 32
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– using the door lock 29
– using the remote control 27
Opening and unlocking
– from inside 30
Options, selecting for
navigation 118
Orientation menu, refer to
Main menu 17
Outlets
– refer to Ventilation 87
Outlets, refer to Air vents 83
Output, refer to Engine
data 224
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate control 86
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 201
P
Paintwork, care 205
Park Distance Control PDC 66
Parking
– vehicle 47
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 66
Parking brake 47
– indicator lamp 13
Parking lamps, replacing
bulb 210
Parking lamps/low beams 79
Parts and accessories, refer to
Your individual vehicle 4
Pathway lighting 79
Personal Profile 26
Phone numbers
– dialing 157, 169
Pinch protection system
– windows 36
Plastic parts, care 206
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter for air
conditioner 85
– refer to
Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 87
Power failure 216
Power window
– safety switch 36
Power windows 35
Power windows, refer to
Windows 35
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 72
Pressure monitoring, tires 69
– Flat Tire Monitor 69
Pressure, tires 190
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– windows 36
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 69
R
Radio
– controls 130
– HD Radio 133
– satellite radio 134
– select waveband 132
– storing stations 133
– switching on/off 130
– tone control 131
– volume 130
Radio key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 46
Radio readiness 46
– switched off 46
– switched on 46
Rain sensor 51
Random sequence
– external devices 145
Range, refer to Cruising
range 56
Reading aloud 182
Reading lamps 82
Rear lamps
– bulb replacement 211
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 211
Rear seat backrest, folding 98
Rear seats
– adjusting 39
– folding down the
backrests 98
Rear window
– windshield wiper 52
Rear window defroster 84, 86
Rear window safety switch 36
Rear-mounted luggage
rack 103
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 41
Reception
– quality 133
– radio station 133
Recirculated-air mode 84, 86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
245
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air
mode 84, 86
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 38
Refueling 188
Releasing
– hood 198
Reminders 181
Remote control 26
– battery renewal 34
– Comfort Access 32
– garage door opener 88
– liftgate 28
– malfunctions 28, 34
– service data 202
Replacement remote
control 26
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 208
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 196
Reporting safety defects 6
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 55
Reservoir for washer
systems 53
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 131
Restraint systems
– for children 43
– refer to Safety belts 40
Reverse
– CD player 141
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 49
– manual transmission 48
Road map 120
Roadside Assistance 218
Roadside parking lamps 81
– replacing bulb 210
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 59
Roof load capacity 226
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 103
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 221
Route 118, 119
– bypassing sections 120
– changing 118, 120
– changing criteria 118
– displaying arrow view 119
– displaying map view
120
–
displaying streets or towns/
cities 119
– selecting 118
Route guidance 118
– bypassing a route
section 120
– changing specified route 118
– continuing 118
– distance and arrival 118
– starting 118
– voice instructions 122
– volume of voice
instructions 122
Route section, changing 120
Route selection 118
RSC Run-flat System
Component, refer to Run-flat
tires 196
Rubber parts, care 205
Run-flat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-flat
tires 196
Run-flat tires 196
– flat tire 71
– Flat Tire Monitor 71
– tire inflation pressure 190
– tire replacement 196
– winter tires 197
S
Safety belt
– number 37
Safety Belt Reminder 41
Safety belts 40
– damage 41
– indicator lamp 41
– reminder 41
– sitting safely 37
Safety belts, care 207
Safety systems
– airbags 76
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 67
– driving stability control
systems 67
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 67
– safety belts 40
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 196
Satellite radio 134
– channel, activating or
deactivating 135
– channel, selecting 135
– channel, storing 136
– favorites 137
– time shift 136
– Traffic Jump 138
Screen, refer to On-board
computer controls 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 220
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 134
Seat adjustment
– mechanical 38
– rear 39
Seats 38
– adjusting the seats 38
– heating 40
– sitting safely 37
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Selecting new scale for
navigation 121
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 48
Selector lever lock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic, refer to
Shiftlock 48
– overriding manually 50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
246
Selector lever positions
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 48
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 218
Service data in the remote
control 202
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 202
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 218
Service requirement display,
refer to Condition Based
Service CBS 202
Service requirements 59
Setting time and date 61
Setting time zone, time, and
date 61
Settings
– clock, 12 h/24 h mode 61
– date format 62
– language 65
Settings and information 57
Shift paddles 49
Shifting gears
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 49
– manual transmission 48
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission, refer
to Changing selector lever
positions 48
Short commands for the voice
activation system 227
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 118
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD player 141
Side airbags 76
Side marker lamps, replacing
bulbs 211
Side turn signal
– replacing bulb 211
Side windows, refer to
Windows 35
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 37
– airbags 37
– safety belts 37
– with head restraint 37
Size, refer to Dimensions 225
Sliding/tilt sunroof
– refer to Glass roof, electric 34
Slot for remote control 46
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 92
Snap-in adapter
– inserting/removing 174
– use 163
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage
compartment 91
Snow chains 197
Socket for On-Board Diagnosis
OBD 203
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances
92
Software u
pdate 149
Speaking, refer to Voice
instructions from navigation
system 122
Special destinations 112
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 200
Speed 224
– with winter tires 197
Speed limit 64
– setting 64
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 64
Speed volume 131
Speedo, refer to
Speedometer 12
Speedometer 12
Split rear seat backrest, refer to
Expanding the cargo area 98
Sport button 69
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 67
Start/Stop button 46
– starting the engine 46
– switching off the engine 47
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump-starting 218
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 46
Starting the engine
– Start/Stop button 46
Start-off assistance, refer to
– DSC 67
– Hill Assist 69
State/province, for
navigation 109
Station, selecting
– radio 132
Status information on the
Control Display 19
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 4
Steering wheel 42
– adjustment 42
– buttons on steering wheel 11
– lock 46
– shift paddles 49
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 48
Storage area
– cargo area 98
Storage compartments 91
Storage space
– storage compartments 91
Storing a destination in the
address book 111
Storing the vehicle 207
Storing tires 197
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 91
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
an
d tires 190
SW, waveband 132
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 47
Switching off the engine
– Start/Stop button 46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
247
Switching on
– audio 130
– CD player 130
– radio 130
Switching the cooling function
on and off 87
Symbols 4
– status information 19
T
Tachometer 55
Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 211
– replacing bulb 211
Tail lamps 211
Tank volume, refer to
Capacities 226
Target cursor for
navigation 114
Tasks 180
Technical data 224
Technical modifications 5
Telephone
– hands-free system 160, 172
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 91
– voice commands 172
Telephone receiving power,
refer to Status
information 19
Temperature display
– setting the units 58
Temperature of coolant, refer
to Coolant temperature 201
Temperature setting
– air conditioner 84
– automatic climate control 86
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 53
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 102
Text message 179
The individual vehicle 4
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 212
Three-point safety belt 40
Tightening the lug bolts
– torque 216
Tightening torque, refer to
Tightening lug bolts 216
Tire failure
– Flat Tire Monitor 71
– indicator/warning lamp 71
– MINI Mobility System 212
– run-flat tires 71
– Tire Pressure Monitor 72
Tire inflation pressure 190
– loss 71, 72
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 72
– limitations of system 72
– resetting system 73
– warning lamp 73
Tire pressure monitoring, refer
to Flat Tire Monitor 69
Tire Quality Grading 194
Tires
– age 196
– breaking in 96
– changing, refer to Changi
ng
wheels 214
– condition 195
– damage 195
– inflation pressure 190
– inflation pressure loss 73
– minimum tread depth 195
– new tires 196
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 69
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 72
– puncture 71
– size 194
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 195
– winter tires 197
– with emergency operation
properties 196
Tires with emergency
operation properties, refer to
Run-flat tires 196
Tires with safety features, refer
to Run-flat tires 196
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 122
Tone
– middle setting 131
Tone during audio playback
– adjusting 131
Torque 224
– lug bolts 216
Tow bar 220
Tow fitting 220
– screw thread 220
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 220
Tow rope 221
Towing 219
– car with automatic
transmission 220
– methods 220
Tow-starting 219
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 72
Track
– selecting on CD 140
Track width, refer to
Dimension 225
Traction control, refer to
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 67
Traffic bulletins
– categories 124
Traffic bulletins, filtering 124
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
information 122
– refer to Route, bypassing
segments 120
Traffic information for
navigation
– displaying
123
Tr
affic information in
navigation
– screen display in the map
view 124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
248
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 48
– manual transmission 48
– overriding selector lever lock
for automatic transmission
with Steptronic 50
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 102
Transporting children safely 43
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 195
Treble, refer to Tone
control 131
Trip computer 57
Trip odometer 55
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 55
Triple turn signal activation 50
Turn signal 50
– front, replacing bulb 210
– indicator lamp 12, 13
– rear, replacing bulb 211
– side, replacing bulb 211
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 225
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 102
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
UTQR 194
Units
– average fuel consumption 58
– temperature 58
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 88
Universal remote control 88
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 33
Unlocking
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– liftgate 33
– setting unlocking
behavior 27
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 32
Updating the navigation
data 108
Upholstery, care 206
USB audio interface 143
USB interface 90
V
Vehicle
– battery 216
– breaking in 96
– cargo loading 98
– dimensions 225
– identification number, refer
to Engine compartment 199
– parking 47
– storage 207
– weight 226
Vehicle jack
– jacking points 215
Ventilation
– air conditioner 87
Ventilation, refer to Climate
control 83
Vents, refer to Air vents 83
Vents, refer to Ventilation 87
Voice commands
– overview 21
– short commands 227
– telephone 172
Voice instructions for
navigation system 122
– repeating 122
– switching on/off 122
– volume 122
Voice phone book 173
Volume 130
– audio sources 130
– mobile phone 157, 168
– voice instructions 122
Volume balance, tone
setting 131
Volume of cargo area 226
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 62
Warning triangle 218
Washer fluid 53
– capacity of reservoir 53
Washer fluid reservoir 53
Washer/wiper system
– washer fluid 53
Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 92
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 97
Waterfall lighting, refer to
Ambient lighting 82
Waveband for radio 132
Wear indicators in tires, refer to
Minimum tread depth 195
Weights 226
Welcome lamps 79
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 225
Wheels and tires 190
Wheels, new 196
Width, refer to
Dimensions 225
Window washer, refer to
Washer fluid 53
Window washer reservoir,
refer to Washer fluid
– volume, refer to
Capacities 226
Window washer system 51
– washer fluid 53
– washer jets 52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
249
Windows 35
– closing 35
– convenient operation 28
– opening 35
– pinch protection system 36
– safety switch 36
Windows, indicator on Control
Display 16
Windshield
– cleaning 52
– defrosting and removing
condensation 85, 87
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 208
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 51
Winter tires 197
– setting speed limit 64
– storage 197
Wiper blade replacement 208
Wiper system 51
Word matching principle for
navigation 116
Work in the engine
compartment 198
X
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
01 40 2 607 549 ue
*BL260754900B*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 549 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Download
Save PDF to desktop
Email
Email completed PDF
Send for Signing
Email for others to sign
Print
Print document
Choose a Field
Click on a field and
select the person that should complete it
Want to add a signature?
You can add a signature field
and assign it to someone else
to sign
Choose a Field
Click on a field and
select the person that should complete it

OWNER'S MANUAL

This document is locked as it has been sent for signing.

You have successfully completed this document.

Other parties need to complete fields in the document. You will recieve an email notification when the document has been completed by all parties.

This document has been signed by all parties.

Completed 22 September 2020

Message

View Audit Log
Print With Audit Log
Duplicate Document